Tektronix Stereo System AWG2005 User Manual

Service Manual  
AWG2005  
Arbitrary Waveform Generator  
070-8962-50  
Warning  
The servicing instructions are for use by qualified  
personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not  
perform any servicing unless you are qualified to  
do so. Refer to all safety summaries prior to  
performing service.  
www.tektronix.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARRANTY  
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and  
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this  
warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor,  
or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.  
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration  
of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be  
responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with  
shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a  
location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for  
paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations.  
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate  
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage  
resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product;  
b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any  
damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been  
modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time  
or difficulty of servicing the product.  
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’  
RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND  
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.  
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR  
THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This is the service manual for the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator.  
The manual contains information needed to service the AWG2005 to the  
module level.  
This manual is divided into sections, such as Specifications and Theory of  
Operation. Further, some sections are divided into subsections, such as  
Product Description and Removal and Installation Procedures.  
Manual Structure  
Sections containing procedures also contain introductions to those proceĆ  
dures. Be sure to read these introductions because they provide information  
needed to do the service correctly and efficiently. The following contains a  
brief description of each manual section.  
H
H
Specifications Ċ contains a description of the AWG2005 and the charĆ  
acteristics that apply to it.  
Operating Information Ċ includes general information and operating  
instructions at the level needed to safely power on and service the  
AWG2005.  
H
H
Theory of Operation Ċ contains circuit descriptions that support general  
service to the module level.  
Performance Verification Ċ contains a collection of procedures for  
confirming that the AWG2005 functions properly and meets warranted  
limits.  
H
H
Adjustment Procedures Ċ contains a collection of procedures for interĆ  
nal calibration the AWG2005 to meet warranted limits.  
Maintenance Ċ contains information and procedures for performing  
preventive and corrective maintenance of the AWG2005. These instrucĆ  
tions include cleaning, module removal and installation, and fault isolaĆ  
tion to the module.  
H
H
Options Ċ contains information on servicing any of the factoryĆinstalled  
options that your AWG2005 includes.  
Electrical Parts List Ċ contains a statement referring youto Mechanical  
Parts List, where both electrical and mechanical modules are listed. See  
below.  
H
H
Diagrams Ċ contains block diagrams and an interconnection diagram  
useful in isolating failed modules.  
Mechanical Parts List Ċ includes a table of all replaceable modules,  
their descriptions, and their Tektronix part numbers.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This manual uses certain conventions that you should become familiar with.  
ManualConventions  
Some sections of the manual contain procedures for you to perform. To  
keep those instructions clear and consistent, this manual uses the following  
conventions:  
H
Instructions for menu selection follow this format: FRONT PANEL BUTĆ  
TON! Main Menu Button! Side Menu Button. For example, Press  
UTILITY! Misc! Config...! Reset to Factory! O.K."  
H
Names of front panel controls and menus appear in the same case  
(initial capitals, all uppercase, etc.) in the manual as is used on the  
AWG2005 front panel and menus. Front panel names are all upperĆcase  
letters; for example, MODE MENU, CH 1, etc.  
H
Instruction steps are numbered unless there is only one step.  
Modules  
Throughout this manual, any replaceable component, assembly, or part of  
the AWG2005 is referred to generically as a module. In general, a module is  
an assembly (like a circuit board), rather than a component (like a resistor or  
an integrated circuit). Sometimes a single component is a module; for  
example, the chassis of the AWG2005 is a module.  
Safety  
Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the Safety Summary near the  
beginning of this manual.  
Other documentation for the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator inĆ  
cludes:  
Finding Other  
Information  
H
The AWG2005 User Manual contains a tutorial to quickly describe how to  
operate the AWG2005. It also includes an inĆdepth discussion on how to  
more completely use AWG2005 features.  
H
The AWG2000 series Programmer Manual explains how to control the  
AWG2005 with a computer through the GPIB or RSĆ232ĆC interface.  
Preface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
vii  
xi  
xiii  
xvii  
xix  
Adjustment Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Strategy for Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tektronix Service Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Warranty Repair Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Repair or Calibration Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Self Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xix  
xix  
xix  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Specifications  
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Nominal Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1Ć1  
1Ć3  
WarrantedCharacteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Performance Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1Ć11  
1Ć11  
Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1Ć19  
Operating Information  
Preparation for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć1  
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Ventilation Requirements2.Ć1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Supplying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power CordInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuse Type andRating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Applying andInterrupting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
PowerĆon Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
PowerĆoff Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Memory Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
InstalledOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć1  
2Ć1  
2Ć2  
2Ć2  
2Ć3  
2Ć4  
2Ć5  
2Ć5  
2Ć5  
2Ć6  
2Ć6  
Instructions for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć7  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table ofContents  
How to Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Internal Diagnostics Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waveform Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waveform Storage and I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Loading Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setting Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operation Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć7  
2Ć7  
2Ć8  
2Ć8  
2Ć11  
2Ć11  
2Ć12  
2Ć12  
2Ć13  
2Ć15  
Theory ofOperation  
Theory ofOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3Ć1  
Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Clock Oscillator (A1 Clock Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Clock Sweep Oscillator (A31 Clock Sweep Board) . . . . . . . . .  
Sequencer (A2 AWG Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waveform Memory (A2 AWG Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DigitalĆtoĆAnalog Converter (DAC) (A11 D/A Board) . . . . . . . .  
Analog Processing (A3/A23 Analog Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CPU and Memory (A6 CPU Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GPIB (A6 CPU Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RSĆ232ĆC (A6 CPU Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display Control (A6 CPU Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front Panel (A12 Key Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Low Voltage Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3Ć1  
3Ć1  
3Ć1  
3Ć1  
3Ć1  
3Ć2  
3Ć2  
3Ć2  
3Ć2  
3Ć2  
3Ć2  
3Ć3  
3Ć3  
3Ć3  
3Ć3  
3Ć3  
3Ć4  
Performance Verification  
Before Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć1  
4Ć1  
4Ć1  
SelfTests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć3  
4Ć3  
4Ć5  
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć7  
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć7  
4Ć8  
4Ć8  
Contents  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Performance Check Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operating Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć9  
4Ć12  
Check Cont Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć12  
Check Triggered Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć14  
Check Gated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć16  
Check Waveform Advance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć18  
Check Autostep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć20  
Arithmetic Operation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć22  
Check External AM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć22  
Check Internal AM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć25  
Check External ADD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć25  
Check Internal Add Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć26  
Clock Frequency and Amplitude Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć27  
Check Clock Frequency Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć27  
Check Clock Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć29  
Gain Accuracy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Offset Accuracy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Pulse Response Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
MARKER OUTAmplitude Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CONTROL SIG OUT Amplitude Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
External Trigger Level Accuracy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
External CLOCK IN Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć30  
4Ć32  
4Ć34  
4Ć36  
4Ć36  
4Ć38  
4Ć38  
4Ć39  
4Ć42  
Optional Check -  
MasterĆSlave Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć44  
4Ć46  
4Ć49  
DIGITAL DATA OUT Check (Option 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Floating Point Processor Check (Option 09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Adjustment Procedures  
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5Ć1  
Maintenance  
Before Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć1  
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Preventing ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Susceptibility to ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć1  
6Ć2  
6Ć2  
6Ć2  
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć5  
General Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Inspection and Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Inspection Ċ Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cleaning Procedure Ċ Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć5  
6Ć5  
6Ć6  
6Ć7  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table ofContents  
Inspection Ċ Interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cleaning Procedure Ċ Interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć7  
6Ć8  
6Ć8  
Removal and Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć9  
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
List of Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Summary of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
AWG2005 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Procedures for External Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
FrontĆpanel Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Line Fuse and Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear Cover and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
EMI Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
FrontĆpanel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Procedures for Internal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
A23 Analog Board or A3 Analog Board (Option 02) . . . . . . .  
Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fan and Fan Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear Shield Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear BNC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
AUX Power Board and AC Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Monitor Module and CRTFrame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
A5 Backplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Lithium Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
FloppyĆdisk Drive Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć9  
6Ć9  
6Ć10  
6Ć10  
6Ć10  
6Ć12  
6Ć13  
6Ć16  
6Ć17  
6Ć18  
6Ć20  
6Ć22  
6Ć22  
6Ć24  
6Ć28  
6Ć29  
6Ć31  
6Ć33  
6Ć35  
6Ć37  
6Ć38  
6Ć39  
6Ć42  
6Ć45  
6Ć49  
6Ć51  
6Ć53  
Repackaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Repackaging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć55  
6Ć55  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
AWG2005 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć57  
6Ć57  
6Ć58  
Checking Diagnostics Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58  
Options  
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
List ofOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Options A1-A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7Ć1  
7Ć1  
7Ć2  
7Ć2  
7Ć2  
Contents  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7Ć2  
7Ć2  
Clock Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Output Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Output Circuit and Output Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Application Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Option 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7Ć3  
7Ć4  
7Ć5  
7Ć7  
7Ć8  
7Ć9  
7Ć9  
7Ć9  
7Ć9  
7Ć9  
7Ć10  
7Ć10  
7Ć10  
Electrical Parts List  
Electrical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8Ć1  
Diagrams  
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9Ć1  
Mechanical Parts List  
Replaceable Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Using the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
10Ć1  
10Ć1  
10Ć2  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
Figure 2Ć1:ăOptional Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć3  
2Ć4  
Figure 2Ć2:ăRear Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2Ć3:ăDisplay Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2Ć4:ăLOAD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2Ć5:ăSETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2Ć6:ăMODE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć10  
2Ć13  
2Ć14  
2Ć16  
Figure 4Ć1:ăDiagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć2:ăCalibrations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć3:ăCont Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć4:ăTriggered Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć5:ăGated Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć4  
4Ć6  
4Ć12  
4Ć14  
4Ć16  
Figure 4Ć6:ăRelationship between 1 Volt or Greater Gate Signal and  
Waveform Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć18  
4Ć19  
4Ć21  
4Ć23  
4Ć24  
4Ć27  
4Ć29  
4Ć31  
4Ć33  
4Ć34  
4Ć36  
4Ć38  
4Ć40  
4Ć42  
4Ć44  
4Ć47  
4Ć48  
Figure 4Ć7:ăWaveform Advance Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć8:ăAutostep Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć9:ăExternal AM Operation Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć10:ăMODE Menu Autostep Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć11:ăClock Frequency Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć12:ăClock Amplitude Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć13:ăGain Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć14:ăOffset Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć15:ăPulse Response Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć16:ăInitial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć17:ăInitial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć18:ăExternal Trigger Level Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . . .  
Figure 4Ć19:ăExternal CLOCK IN Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć20:ăSlave Operation Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć21:ăDigital Data Out Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 4Ć22:ăOutput Pins on the Digital Data Out Cable . . . . . . . . . . .  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
Figure 6Ć1:ăAWG2005 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć2:ăGuide to Removal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć3:ăExternal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć4:ăInternal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć5:ăFrontĆpanel Knob Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć6:ăLine Fuse and Line Cord Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć7:ăRear Cover and Cabinet Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć12  
6Ć13  
6Ć14  
6Ć15  
6Ć17  
6Ć19  
6Ć21  
Figure 6Ć8:ăFront Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Button Removal  
(Front Cover not Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć23  
6Ć25  
6Ć26  
6Ć27  
6Ć30  
6Ć32  
6Ć34  
6Ć36  
6Ć37  
6Ć39  
6Ć41  
6Ć43  
6Ć44  
6Ć46  
6Ć50  
6Ć52  
6Ć54  
6Ć59  
6Ć60  
Figure 6Ć9:ăFrontĆpanel Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć10:ăA12 Keyboard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć11:ăDisassembly of FrontĆpanel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć12:ăA23/A3 Analog Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć13:ăConnector Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć14:ăFan and Fan Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć15:ăRear Shield Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć16:ăRear BNC Connectors Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć17:ăPower Supply Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć18:ăAUX Power Board and AC Inlet Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć19:ăMonitor Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć20:ăCRT Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć21:ăBoard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć22:ăA5 Backplane Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć23:ăBattery Location on the A5 Backplane Board . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć24:ăFloppyĆdisk Drive Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć25:ăPrimary Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć26:ăCPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć27:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 1 Ċ  
Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć61  
6Ć62  
6Ć62  
Figure 6Ć28:ăAUX Power Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć29:ăPower Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć30:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 2 Ċ  
A6 CPU Board or FrontĆpanel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć63  
6Ć64  
Figure 6Ć31:ăKey Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć32:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 3 Ċ  
Monitor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć65  
6Ć66  
6Ć66  
6Ć67  
6Ć68  
Figure 6Ć33:ăMonitor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć34:ăHorizontal and Vertical Sync Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć35:ăA Video Signal with White and Black Levels . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 6Ć36:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 4 Ċ Module Isolation . . . .  
viii  
Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
Figure 7Ć1:ăOption 04 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7Ć3  
7Ć3  
7Ć5  
7Ć5  
7Ć6  
7Ć6  
7Ć7  
7Ć8  
Figure 7Ć2:ăOption 04 Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 7Ć3:ăGeneration of Excess Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 7Ć4:ăOutput Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 7Ć5:ăOutput Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 7Ć6:ăData Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 7Ć7:ăDigital Data Out Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 7Ć8:ăWaveform Reproduction Circuit Example . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 9Ć1:ăBlock Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 9Ć2:ăInterconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9Ć3  
9Ć5  
Figure 10Ć1:ăCabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć2:ăMain Chassis andCRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć3:ăMain Chassis andCircuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć4:ăCircuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć5:ăFront Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć6:ăOption 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć7:ăOption 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć8:ăOption 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 10Ć9:ăOption 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
10Ć5  
10Ć7  
10Ć9  
10Ć11  
10Ć13  
10Ć15  
10Ć16  
10Ć17  
10Ć18  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
x
Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Tables  
TableĂ1Ć1: Period Jitter (CH1 Marker Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1Ć7  
1Ć7  
1Ć7  
1Ć7  
TableĂ1Ć2: Cycle to Cycle Jitter (CH1 Marker Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ1Ć3: Period Jitter (Clock Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ1Ć4: Cycle to Cycle Jitter (Clock Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ2Ć1:ăPowerĆcord Conductor Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ2Ć2:ăFuse Type and Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2Ć2  
2Ć4  
TableĂ4Ć1:ăTest Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ4Ć2:ăTest Equipment For Optional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ4Ć3:ăFile List for Performance Check Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ4Ć4:ăClock Frequency Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4Ć8  
4Ć9  
4Ć10  
4Ć29  
TableĂ6Ć1:ăRelative Susceptibility to StaticĆdischarge Damage . . . . .  
TableĂ6Ć2:ăExternal Inspection Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ6Ć3:ăInternal Inspection Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ6Ć4:ăEquipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6Ć3  
6Ć6  
6Ć7  
6Ć11  
TableĂ7Ć1:ăInternational Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ7Ć2:ăOption 04 Digital Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ7Ć3:ăStandard Accessories List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ7Ć4:ăOptional Accessories List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TableĂ7Ć5:ăMaintenance Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7Ć2  
7Ć4  
7Ć10  
7Ć10  
7Ć11  
xi  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Tables  
Contents  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Summary  
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage  
to this product or any products connected to it.  
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.  
Injury Precautions  
Use Proper  
Power Cord  
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.  
Avoid Electric  
Overload  
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a voltage to a terminal that is  
outside the range specified for that terminal.  
Ground the Product  
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord.  
To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth  
ground. Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the  
product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.  
Do Not Operate  
Without Covers  
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with covers or  
panels removed.  
Use Proper Fuse  
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.  
To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions.  
Do Not Operate in  
Wet/DampConditions  
Do Not Operate  
in Explosive  
Atmosphere  
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive  
atmosphere.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Summary  
Product Damage Precautions  
Use Proper  
Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the  
voltage specified.  
PowerSource  
Provide Proper  
Ventilation  
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.  
Do Not Operate With  
Suspected Failures  
If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified  
service personnel.  
Safety Terms and Symbols  
Terms in This Manual  
These terms may appear in this manual:  
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in  
injury or loss of life.  
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in  
damage to this product or other property.  
Terms on the Product  
These terms may appear on the product:  
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the  
marking.  
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you  
read the marking.  
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.  
xiv  
AWG2005 UserManual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Summary  
Symbols on the  
Product  
The following symbols may appear on the product:  
Double  
Insulated  
DANGER  
High Voltage  
Protective Ground  
(Earth) Terminal  
ATTENTION  
Refer to  
Manual  
Certifications and Compliances  
CSA Certified Power  
Cords  
CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in  
the North America power network. All other power cords supplied are approved  
for the country of use.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Summary  
xvi  
AWG2005 User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Safety Summary  
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service  
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service  
procedures.  
Do Not Service Alone  
Disconnect Power  
Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another  
person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present.  
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the main power by means of the power  
cord or, if provided, the power switch.  
Use Caution When  
Servicing the CRT  
To avoid electric shock or injury, use extreme caution when handling the CRT.  
Only qualified personnel familiar with CRT servicing procedures and precauĆ  
tions should remove or install the CRT.  
CRTsretain hazardousvoltagesfor long periodsof time after power isturned  
off. Before attempting any servicing, discharge the CRT by shorting the anode  
to chassis ground. When discharging the CRT, connect the discharge path to  
ground and then the anode. Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode.  
Do not nick or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing  
or installing it. When handling the CRT, wear safety goggles and heavy gloves  
for protection.  
Use Care When  
Servicing With Power  
On  
Dangerousvoltagesor currentsmay exist in thisproduct. Disconnect power,  
remove battery (if applicable), and disconnect test leads before removing  
protective panels, soldering, or replacing components.  
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.  
XĆRadiation  
To avoid xĆradiation exposure, do not modify or otherwise alter the highĆvoltage  
circuitry or the CRT enclosure. XĆray emissions generated within this product  
have been sufficiently shielded.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Safety Summary  
xviii  
AWG2005 User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This manual contains information needed to properly service the AWG2005  
Arbitrary Waveform Generator, as well as general information critical to safe  
and effective servicing.  
To prevent personal injury or damage to the AWG2005, consider the followĆ  
ing before attempting service:  
H
The procedures in this manual should be performed only by a qualified  
service person  
H
H
Read the Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual  
Read Preparation for Use in section 2, Operating Information  
When using this manual for servicing, be sure to follow all warnings, cauĆ  
tions and notes.  
Generally, the internal calibration described in section 5, Adjustment ProceĆ  
dures, should be done every 12 months. In addition, internal calibration is  
recommended after module replacement or temperature changes.  
Adjustment Interval  
Strategyfor Servicing  
Throughout this manual the term "module" refers to any fieldĆreplaceable  
component, assembly, or part of the AWG2005.  
This manual contains all the information needed for periodic maintenance of  
the AWG2005. (Examples of such information are procedures for checking  
performance and for readjustment.)  
Further, it contains all information for corrective maintenance down to the  
module level. To isolate a failure to a module, use the fault isolation proceĆ  
dures found in Troubleshooting, part of section 6, Maintenance. To remove  
and replace any failed module, follow the instructions in Removal and InstalĆ  
lation Procedures, also part of section 6. After isolating a faulty module,  
replace it with a fullyĆtested module obtained from the factory. Section 10,  
Mechanical Parts List, contains part number and ordering information for all  
replaceable modules.  
Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other  
services that may provide a costĆeffective answer to your service needs.  
Tektronix Service  
Offerings  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Whether providing warranty repair service or any of the other services listed  
below, Tektronix service technicians are well equipped to service the  
AWG2005. Tektronix technicians train on Tektronix products; they have  
access to the latest information on improvements to the AWG2005 as well as  
the latest new options.  
Warranty Repair Service  
Tektronix warrants this product for one year from date of purchase. (The  
warranty appears on the backof the title page in this manual.) Tektronix  
technicians provide warranty service at most Tektronix service locations  
worldwide. The Tektronix product catalog lists all service locations worldĆ  
wide.  
Repair or Calibration Service  
The following services can be purchased to tailor repair and/or calibration of  
the AWG2005 to fit your requirements.  
AtĆdepot Service Ċ Tektronix offers several standardĆpriced adjustment  
(calibration) and repair services:  
H
H
A single repair and/or adjustment  
Calibrations using equipment and procedures that meet the traceability  
standards specific to the local area  
H
Annual maintenance agreements that provide for either calibration and  
repair or calibration only of the AWG2005  
Of these services, the annual maintenance agreement offers a particularly  
costĆeffective approach to service for many owners of the AWG2005.  
Self Service  
Tektronix supports repair to the module level by providing Module Exchange.  
Module Exchange Ċ This service reduces downĆtime for repair by allowĆ  
ing you to exchange most modules for remanufactured ones. Tektronix ships  
an updated and tested exchange module from the Beaverton, Oregon  
service center, typically within 24 hours. Each module comes with a 90Ćday  
service warranty.  
For More Information Ċ Contact your local Tektronix service center or  
sales engineer for more information on any of the repair or adjustment  
services just described.  
xx  
Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product Description  
The AWG2005 is a portable arbitrary waveform generator capable of generĆ  
ating both arbitrary waveforms and standard function waveforms. Key feaĆ  
tures include:  
H
Arbitrary waveform generation from waveform data files that you:  
H
H
H
H
Create using the graphical waveform editor  
Generate from equations you create using the equation editor  
Transfer from GPIB or RSĆ232ĆC interfaces  
Directly transfer from a Tektronix TDS Digitizing Oscilloscope, 2200  
Series, 2400 Series or 11000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope  
(DSO), DSA Series Digitizing Analyzer, RTD710A Transient Digitizer,  
AFG2020 Arbitrary Function Generator, or from another AWG2000  
Series Arbitrary Waveform Generator  
H
H
H
Continuous generation of arbitrary waveform data files you specify in a  
sequence file  
Stepped arbitrary waveform generation of waveform data files and/or  
sequence files you specify in an autostep file (Autostep mode)  
2 Channel or 4 channel waveform output to 10 V (the 4 channels are  
pĆp  
Option 02)  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Point clock rate from 0.01 Hz to 20 MHz  
Continuous, triggered or gated trigger modes  
Waveform advance and autosteop modes  
Amplitude modulation (CH2 or external signal to CH1)  
Output waveform Add function (CH 2 or external signal to CH1)  
Internal waveform memory of 64K   12 bits for each channel  
Internal catalog memory of 4 M  
Waveform file storage in internal nonvolatile memory (512 K) or on disk  
Waveform marker (per channel)  
RearĆpanel waveform output in digital format (Option 04)  
Editing the clock sweep (Option 05)  
Editing in frequency domain (floating point processor, Option 09)  
Sample waveform library and GPIB programming examples on disk  
Standard function waveforms  
Internal diagnostic/calibration  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product Description  
1Ć2  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nominal Traits  
This section contains tables that list the various nominal traits that describe  
the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. Electrical and mechanical traits  
are included.  
Nominal traits are described not by equipment performance, but by parameĆ  
ters like memory capacity.  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Arbitrary Waveforms  
Memory  
Waveform  
64K x 12 bits  
The Waveform can position 256 data point boundary in the waveform  
memory.  
The maximum waveforms in the waveform memory is 256.  
64 K x 1 bit  
Marker  
Minimum Data Length  
Sequence  
16 points for the Waveform and the Marker.  
32 K x 16 bits  
A Sequence requires minimum 7 words.  
Scan Counter  
Waveform  
1 to 64 K (16 bits)  
Sequence  
1 to 64 K (16 bits)  
Catalog Memory  
4 M bytes  
Clock Generator  
Frequency Range  
Resolution  
0.01 Hz to 20 MHz  
4 digits (The maximum Resolution 0.01% is obtained at the value "9999".)  
Reference Oscillator  
Nominal Frequency  
12.8 MHz  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Clock Generator (Option 05)  
0.01 Hz to 20 MHz  
Characteristics  
Frequency Range  
Resolution  
Up to 7 digits  
Sweep  
Type  
Linear, Log, Arbitrary  
Continuous, Triggered, Gated  
1 ms to 65.535 ms  
8 Kwords  
Mode  
Update Rate  
Points per sweep  
Frequency Resolution  
Reference Oscillator  
Nominal Frequency  
0.0298 Hz  
12.8 MHz  
Main Output  
DA Converter  
Resolution  
Amplitude  
Range  
12 bits  
0.05 to 10 VpĆp into 50W  
The amplitude range expands about 2 times (20 VpĆp) into open circuit.  
It's actual value is two times the displayed value. The absolute peak AmpliĆ  
tude plus the Offset is limited to +10 V or -10V.  
Resolution  
Offset  
1 mV  
Range  
-5.0 to 5.0 V into 50W  
The offset range expands about 2 times (-10 V to 10V) into open circuit.  
It's actual value is two times the displayed value. The absolute peak AmpliĆ  
tude plus the Offset is limited to +10 V or -10V.  
-200 mA to 200 mA (Current source output)  
Resolution  
Impedance  
5 mV  
50W  
1Ć4  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Performance  
Test  
Operating Modes  
Continuous  
Check Cont  
Mode,  
page4Ć12.  
Generates the waveform or sequence continuously.  
Triggered  
Gated  
Check TrigĆ  
gered Mode,  
page4Ć14.  
Output quiescent until triggered by an GPIB, external, or manual  
trigger; then generates a waveform or sequence only one time.  
Check Gated  
Mode  
page4Ć16.  
Sameas Continuous mode, except waveforms or sequences  
areoutput for theduration of thegated signal.  
Waveform Advance  
Continuous  
Check WaveĆ  
form Advance  
Mode,  
Continuously generates the waveform or sequence in the SeĆ  
quence file; the next trigger advances to the next waveform/seĆ  
quence.  
page4Ć18.  
Step  
Output quiescent until triggered by an GPIB, external, or manual  
trigger; then generates the waveform/sequence in the Sequence  
file. When the scan count reaches its value, then stops output  
and waits for the next trigger.  
Autostep  
Continuous  
Similar operation to the Waveform Advance : Continuous, but  
the Autostep file is used instead of the Sequence file and the  
output parameters (Amplitude, Offset, etc.) are changed.  
Check AutoĆ  
step Mode,  
page4Ć20.  
Step  
Similar operation to the Waveform Advance : Step, but theAuĆ  
tostep file is used instead of the Sequence file and the output  
parameters (Amplitude, Offset, etc.) are changed.  
Master  
Slave  
ProvidetheClock and theTrigger to the Slave AWG2005 for the  
parallel operation.  
ReceivetheClock and theTrigger from the  
the parallel operation.  
Master AWG2005 for  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Filters  
Type  
Low Pass (-24 dB/Oct)  
5MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
500kHz  
Auxiliary Output  
MARKER  
Amplitude  
>2Vinto 50 W  
Impedance  
50W  
Period Jitter  
Refer to Table 1Ć1 (Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)  
Refer to Table 1Ć2 (Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)  
Cycle to Cycle Jitter  
CLOCK  
Amplitude  
Impedance  
>2Vinto 50 W  
50W  
Period Jitter  
Refer to Table 1Ć3 (Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)  
Refer to Table 1Ć4 (Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)  
Cycle to Cycle Jitter  
CONTROL SIG  
Amplitude  
>2Vinto 50 W  
Impedance  
50W  
SWEEP (Option 05)  
Amplitude  
0 Vto 5 V  
(Same waveform as selected sweep. Amplitude is dependent on start and  
stop frequencies and a 5 V limit.)  
Impedance  
600W  
Digital Data Out (option 04)  
Output Signals  
CH1  
Data (D0 to D11), Clock  
Data (D0 to D11), Clock  
>2 Vinto 50 W  
CH2  
Amplitude  
Impedance  
Connector  
50W  
28 pin Header  
1Ć6  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
TableĂ1Ć1: Period Jitter (CH1 Marker Out)  
Clock=20MS/s  
StdDev  
Clock=10MS/s  
Pk-Pk  
StdDev  
24.0 ps  
Pk-Pk  
24.0 ps  
140.0 ps  
120.0 ps  
TableĂ1Ć2: Cycle to Cycle Jitter (CH1 Marker Out)  
Clock=20MS/s  
StdDev  
Clock=10MS/s  
StdDev  
Pk-Pk  
Pk-Pk  
40.0 ps  
220.0 ps  
40.0 ps  
200.0 ps  
TableĂ1Ć3: Period Jitter (Clock Out)  
Clock=20MS/s  
Clock=10MS/s  
StdDev  
StdDev  
24.0 ps  
Pk-Pk  
Pk-Pk  
140.0 ps  
24.0 ps  
120.0 ps  
TableĂ1Ć4: Cycle to Cycle Jitter (Clock Out)  
Clock=20MS/s  
StdDev  
Clock=10MS/s  
Pk-Pk  
StdDev  
40.0 ps  
Pk-Pk  
40.0 ps  
220.0 ps  
200.0 ps  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Auxiliary Input  
TRIGGER  
Threshold Level  
-5 V to 5V  
0.1V  
Resolution  
Impedance  
10kW  
AM  
Range  
2 VpĆp (-1V to 1V) for 100% modulation  
Impedance  
10kW  
Add  
Range  
10 VpĆp (-5 V to 5V)  
Impedance  
CONTROL SIG  
Threshold Level  
Impedance  
CLOCK  
50W  
0.8 V to 2.0 V  
10kW  
Threshold Level  
Impedance  
0.8 V to 2.0 V  
330W (Master mode), 10kW (Slave mode)  
Function Generator  
Waveform Shape  
Output Parameter  
Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Pulse  
(1 MHz filter is inserted when Sine is selected.)  
All of these values with the exception of frequency can be set indepenĆ  
dently for each channel. Frequency settings apply to all channels.  
Frequency  
Amplitude  
Offset  
1.000 Hz to 200 kHz  
Can be set between 50 mV and 10 V in 1 mV increments  
Can be set between "5 V in 5 mV increments  
Normal, Invert  
Polarity  
Duty  
0% to 100% Pulse only. Can be set in 1% increments  
Continuous mode  
Operating Mode  
Auxiliary Output  
Marker  
2V into 50W, generated at the starting point of the waveform. The pulse  
width will vary depending on the frequency.  
1Ć8  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Display  
CRT  
Display Area  
Resolution  
132mm (5.2 inches) horizontally by 99mm (3.9 inches) vertically  
640 (H) x 480 (V) pixels  
AC Power Source  
AC Line Power  
Fuse Rating  
Battery  
6A first blow, 250 V, UL198G(3AG) or 5 A (T), 250 V, IEC127  
Li3 V, 650 mAH  
Type  
Mechanical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Net Weight  
Standard  
Size  
10.7 kg  
Height  
16cm (6.4 inches) with feet  
Width  
36cm (14.3 inches) with handle  
Length  
49cm (19.25 inches) with front cover  
56cm (22.2 inches) with handle extended  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
1Ć10  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranted Characteristics  
This section will describe the warranted characteristics ofthe AWG2005.  
These can be divided into two main categories: electrical characteristics and  
environmental characteristics.  
The electrical characteristics are valid under the following conditions:  
Performance  
Conditions  
1) The instrument must have been calibrated at an ambient temperature  
between +20_ C to +30_ C.  
2) The instrument must be in an environment whose limits are described in  
Environmental Characteristics.  
3) All tolerance limits apply after a 20 minute warm up and an execution of  
the selfcalibration.  
4) The instrument is operating at an ambient temperature between  
+10_ C to +40_ C, unless otherwise noted.  
Electrical Characteristics  
Characteristics  
Description  
Performance  
Test  
Clock Generator  
Accuracy  
Check Clock  
Frequency  
Accuracy,  
+15_ C to +30_  
C
C
0.005%  
0.01%  
page 4Ć27.  
+10_ C to +40_  
Reference Oscillator  
Accuracy  
"1ppm  
Stability  
"1 ppm/year (20_ C to 30_ C)  
Clock Generator (Option 05)  
Accuracy  
Check Clock  
Frequency  
Accuracy,  
+15_ C to +30_  
C
C
0.0005%  
0.001%  
page 4Ć27.  
+10_ C to +40_  
Reference Oscillator  
Accuracy  
"1ppm  
Stability  
"1 ppm/year (20_ C to 30_ C)  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Performance  
Test  
Main Output  
Amplitude  
Except multiply(AM) and add(Add) operation  
Check Gain  
Accuracy,  
page 4Ć30.  
Clock 1 MHz, Waveform data; 000 and FFF, Norm, No Filter, No  
Offset  
DC Accuracy  
0.050 V to 0.999 V  
1.000 V to 10.000 V  
Offset  
" (0.5% of amplitude + 5 mV)  
" (1% of amplitude + 50 mV)  
Check Offset  
Accuracy,  
page 4Ć32.  
Clock 1 MHz, Waveform data;FFF, Norm, No Filter, Amplitude  
0.05V.  
Accuracy  
" (1% of Offset + 10 mV)  
Clock 20 MHz, Waveform Data; 000 (16 points) and FFF (16  
points), Norm, No Filter, Amplitude 5 V, No Offset.  
Pulse Response  
Pulse ReĆ  
sponse  
Check,  
Rise/Fall Time  
Flatness  
<35 ns  
page 4Ć34.  
within <3% (After 150 ns from rise/fall edges)  
within <7%  
Aberration  
Cross talk between ChanĆ  
nels  
Sine (512 points), 20 MHz Clock, Norm, No Filter, Amplitude 5 V,  
No Offset  
<-70 dBc  
Noise Floor  
Clock 20 MHz, Waveform Data; 7FF, Norm, No Filter, No Offset.  
<-110 dBm/Hz (at 1 MHz)  
0.5V  
5.0V  
<-95 dBm/Hz (at 1 MHz)  
Sine Wave Characteristics  
Flatness  
F.G mode, 100 Hz to 200 kHz, No Offset  
within "4%  
Amplitude 1 V, 1 kHz reference  
T.H.D  
5.0V  
Including up to 4th Harmonics  
<-55 dBc  
1Ć12  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Performance  
Test  
AM and Add  
AM  
CH1 : Sine (512 points), Clock 20 MHz, AM, No Filter,  
Amplitude 5 V, No Offset  
CH2 : Waveform Data; FFF, No Filter, Amplitude 10 V  
Internal  
Check InterĆ  
nal AM OpĆ  
eration,  
Amplitude Accuracy  
Add 5% to the Amplitude Specification  
*CH1 Out = CH1 x CH2,  
page 4Ć25.  
Frequency Response  
External  
DC to 10 MHz (-3 dB)  
Check ExterĆ  
nal AM OpĆ  
eration,  
Sensitivity  
2 Vp-p (" 5%) signal causes 100% modulation.  
page 4Ć22.  
*CH1 Out = CH1 x Ext Signal  
Ext Signal  
1V, 100% modulation  
0V, 50% modulation  
-1V, 0% modulation  
Frequency Response  
DC to 10 MHz (-3 dB)  
Add  
CH1 : sine (512 points), Clock 20 MHz, Add, No Filter,  
Amplitude 5 V, No Offset  
CH2 : Waveform Data; FFF, No Filter, Amplitude 2 V  
Internal  
Check InterĆ  
nal Add OpĆ  
eration,  
Amplitude Accuracy  
Add 5% to the Amplitude Specification  
*CH1 Out = CH1 + CH2  
page 4Ć26.  
Frequency Response  
External  
DC to 10 MHz (-3 dB)  
Check ExterĆ  
nal ADD OpĆ  
eration,  
Amplitude Accuracy  
Add 5% to the Amplitude Specification  
*CH1 Out = CH1 + Ext Signal  
page 4Ć25.  
Frequency Response  
DC to 10 MHz (-3 dB)  
*Note: Output Amplitude can't exceed 10 Vp-p (into 50W)  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Performance  
Test  
Filter  
Aberration  
Rise Time  
5MHz  
within "7%  
70ns " 20%  
175ns "20%  
350ns " 20%  
700ns " 20%  
2MHz  
1MHz  
500kHz  
AuxiliaryOutput  
MARKER  
MARKER  
OUT AmpliĆ  
tude Check,  
page 4Ć36.  
Amplitude  
>2 V into 50W  
CLOCK  
Clock AmpliĆ  
tude Check,  
page 4Ć29.  
Amplitude  
CONTROL SIG  
>2 V into 50W  
CONTROL  
SIG OUT AmĆ  
plitude  
Amplitude  
>2 V into 50W  
Check,  
page 4Ć38.  
Digital Data Out (Option 04)  
Amplitude  
>2 V into 50W  
DIGITAL  
DATA OUT  
Check,  
page 4Ć46.  
Skew Between Data  
Clock to Data Delay  
within 15 ns  
Within 15 ns  
1Ć14  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Auxiliary Input  
TRIGGER  
External TrigĆ  
ger Level AcĆ  
curacy  
Check,  
page 4Ć39.  
Accuracy  
" (5% of Level + 0.1 V)  
150 ns minimum  
Pulse Width  
Input Swing  
0.2 VpĆp minimum  
Maximum Input Volts  
Trigger Hold Off  
"10 V (DC + peak AC)  
2 ms + 1 Clock (Excluding Autostep mode)  
AM  
Sine (512 points), Clock 20 MHz, AM, No Filter, Amplitude 5 V,  
No Offset  
Amplitude Accuracy  
Maximum Input Volts  
within 5% (1.9 VpĆp to 2.1 VpĆp for 100% modulation)  
"5 V (DC + peak AC)  
Sine (512 points), Clock 20 MHz, Add, No filter, Amplitude 5 V,  
No Offset  
Add  
Amplitude Accuracy  
Maximum Input Volts  
CONTROL SIG  
Threshold Level  
Pulse Width  
Add 5% to the Amplitude Specification  
"5 V (DC + peak AC)  
Master-Slave  
Operation  
Check,  
TTL Level (0.8 V to 2.0 V)  
40 ns minimum  
0 V to 5 V  
page 4Ć44.  
Input Volts  
CLOCK  
External  
CLOCK IN  
Check,  
page 4Ć42.  
Threshold Level  
Rise/Fall Time  
Pulse Width  
TTL Level (0.8V to 2.0 V)  
within 1 ms  
20 ns minimum  
0 V to 5 V  
Input Volts  
Frequency Range  
1 Hz to 20 MHz  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Electrical Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Voltage  
AC Power Source  
Rating Voltage  
100 VAC to 240 VAC  
Continuous range, CAT II  
Range  
90 VAC to 250 VAC  
90 VAC to 127 VAC  
48 Hz to 63 Hz  
48 Hz to 440 Hz  
Maximum Power Consumption 300W  
Maximum Current  
4A  
Grounding Impedance  
The impedance for the chassis ground and power plug ground pins is  
0.1W at 30A.  
Primary Circuit Dielectric  
Voltage withstand Test  
1500 Vrms, 50 Hz for 15 seconds, without breakdown.  
Environmental Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Temperature  
Operating  
+10_C to + 40_C  
Non operating  
Relative Humidity  
Operating  
-20_C to + 60_C  
20% to 80% (No condensation)  
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 29.4_C  
5% to 90% (No condensation)  
Non operating  
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 40.0_C  
Altitude  
Operating  
To 4.5 km (15000 ft).  
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1_C each 300 m above  
1.5 km.  
Non operating  
To 15 km (50000 ft).  
1Ć16  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Environmental Characteristics  
Description  
Characteristics  
Dynamics  
Vibration  
Operating  
Shock  
Non operating  
0.33 mmpĆp, 10 to 55 Hz, 15 minutes  
2
294 m/s (30 G), halfĆsine, 11 ms duration.  
Installation Requirements  
Power Consumption  
(Fully Loaded)  
300 watts max. Maximum line current is 4 A rms at 50 Hz, 90 V line.  
30 A peak for < 5 line cycles, after product has been off for at least 30 s.  
Surge Current  
Cooling Clearance  
Top Clearance  
Side Clearance  
Rear Clearance  
7.6cm (3 inches)  
15cm (6 inches)  
7.6cm (3 inches)  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
1Ć18  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typical Characteristics  
This section will describe the typical characteristics for the AWG2005. These  
values represent typical or average performance andare not absolutely  
guaranteed.  
Characteristics  
Description  
Main Output  
DA Converter  
Integral Non Linearity  
Differential Non Linearity  
Skew between channels  
Delay Master to Slave  
1LSB  
1LSB  
5 ns  
5 ns  
Filters  
Delay  
5MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
500kHz  
80ns  
190ns  
400ns  
800ns  
Auxiliary Output  
MARKER  
Marker to Signal Delay  
35ns  
Auxiliary Input  
TRIGGER  
Trigger to Signal delay  
Internal Clock  
400 ns (Excluding Clock Sweep mode)  
400 ns + 2 Clock  
External Clock  
Power Supply  
Battery  
Back Up Time  
4 years  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Certifications and compliances  
Category  
Standards or description  
EC Declaration of Conformity -  
EMC  
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was  
demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European  
Communities:  
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:  
EN 55022  
Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions  
AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions  
EN 50081Ć1 Emissions:  
EN60555Ć2  
EN 50082Ć1 Immunity:  
IEC801Ć2  
IEC801Ć3  
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity  
RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity  
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity  
IEC801Ć4  
Australian/New Zealand  
declaration of Conformity Ć EMC  
Complies with EMC provision of Radio-communications Act per the following standard:  
AS/NZS 2064.1/2 Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment: 1992  
EC Declaration of Conformity -  
Low Voltage  
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the  
European Communities:  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC  
EN 61010Ć1/A1:1992  
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for  
measurement, control and laboratory use.  
Approvals  
Complies with the following safety standards:  
UL3111-1, First Edition  
Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment.  
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.1010.1Ć92 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for  
measurement, control and laboratory use.  
Installation Category Description  
Terminals on this product may have different installation (over-voltage) category designations. The  
installation categories are:  
Category  
CAT III  
Examples of products in this category  
DistributionĆlevel mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this  
level is typically in a fixed industrial location.  
CAT II  
CAT I  
LocalĆlevel mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances,  
portable tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cordĆconnected.  
Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.  
Pollution Degree  
A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product.  
Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external.  
Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.  
Pollution Degree 2  
Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a  
temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be  
expected. This location is a typical office/home environment.  
Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of  
service.  
1Ć20  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
Certifications and compliances (cont.)  
Category  
Standards or description  
Conditions of Approval  
Safety Certifications/Compliances are made for the following conditions:  
Altitude (maximum operation): 2000 meters  
Equipment type:  
IEC Characteristics  
Test and Measuring  
Installation Category II (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex J)  
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010-1)  
Safety Class I (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex H)  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
1Ć21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characteristics  
1Ć22  
Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation for Use  
This subsection describes how to prepare the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform  
Generator for use. The information describes these items:  
H
H
H
H
Proper operating environment  
Checking power cord and line voltage configurations  
Checking the fuse  
PowerĆon and powerĆoff cycles  
To ensure proper AWG2005 operation and long life, note these environmenĆ  
tal requirements.  
Operating  
Environment  
Operating Temperature  
The AWG2005 operates in an environment with an ambient air temperature  
between +10_ĂC and +40_ĂC. The AWG2005 storage temperature ranges  
from -20_ĂC to +60_ĂC. After storage at temperatures outside the operating  
limits, allow the AWG2005 chassis to stabilize at a safe operating temperaĆ  
ture before applying power.  
Ventilation Requirements  
Air drawn in and exhausted through the cabinet side and bottom panels  
cools AWG2005 internal circuits. To ensure proper cooling, allow the followĆ  
ing clearances:  
Top and back  
Left and right  
7.6Ăcm (3 in.)  
15Ăcm (6 in.)  
The feet on the bottom of the AWG2005 cabinet provide the required clearĆ  
ance when it is set on a flat surface. The top of the AWG2005 does not  
require ventilation clearance.  
CAUTION  
To prevent temporary shutdown of the AWG2005, do not restrict air  
flow through the chassis. If the AWG2005 shuts down unexpectedly,  
improve ventilation around the AWG2005 and wait a few minutes to  
allow it to cool down; then switch the power on again.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation for Use  
Before installing the AWG2005, note these precautions:  
Supplying Power  
WARNING  
To avoid equipment failure and potential fire or personal shock  
hazards, do not exceed the maximum rated operating voltage of  
250ĂV between the voltageĆtoĆground (earth) and either pole of the  
power source. The AWG2005 operates from a singleĆphase power  
source and has a threeĆwire power cord with a twoĆpole, threeĆterĆ  
minal grounding plug. Also, before making connection to the power  
source, be sure the AWG2005 has a suitable twoĆpole, threeĆtermiĆ  
nal groundingĆtype plug.  
To avoid personal shock hazard, do not contact conductive parts.  
All accessible conductive parts are directly connected through the  
grounding conductor of the power cord to the grounded (earthing)  
contact of the power plug. The AWG2005 is safety Class 1 equipĆ  
ment (IEC designation).  
To avoid personal shock hazard, do not defeat the grounding  
connection. Insert the power input plug only in a mating receptacle  
with a grounding contact where earth ground has been verified by a  
qualified service person. Also, for electricalĆshock protection, make  
the grounding connection before making connection to the  
AWG2005 input or output terminals.  
The AWG2005 ships with the required power cord as ordered by the cusĆ  
tomer. Table 2Ć1 gives the colorĆcoding of the conductors in the power cord.  
Figure 2Ć1 shows information on the available power cords.  
Power Cord  
Information  
TableĂ2Ć1:ăPowerĆcord Conductor Identification  
Conductor  
Color  
Alternate Color  
Black  
Ungrounded (Line)  
Grounding (Neutral)  
Brown  
Light Blue  
White  
Grounding (Earthing) Green/Yellow  
Green  
2Ć2  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation for Use  
Standard*  
North American  
115V  
Option A1  
Universal Euro  
230V  
Option A2  
UK  
Option A3  
Australian  
230V  
230V  
Option A4*  
North American  
230V  
Option A5  
Switzerland  
230V  
Option 1A*  
Option 1B  
North American  
3ĆPhase  
North American  
115V/High Power  
* Canadian Standards Association certification  
includes these power plugs for use in the  
North American power network  
Figure 2Ć1:ăOptional Power Cords  
Section 1, Specifications, lists the line voltage and frequencyranges over  
Rear Panel Controls  
which the AWG2005 operates.  
Figure 2Ć2 shows the rear panel controls for the AWG2005.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation for Use  
Power Connector  
WARNING  
ATTENTION  
!
!
5J52  
Fuse  
Principal Power Switch  
Figure 2Ć2:ăRear Panel Controls  
The AWG2005 uses the same fuse for all operating line voltage range. There  
are two types of fuses provided. Here is the fuse type and rating.  
Fuse Type and Rating  
TableĂ2Ć2:ăFuse Type and Rating  
Fuse  
Fuse  
Fuse Cap  
Part Number  
Part Number  
6mm(0.25 inch) x 32mm(1.25  
inch )  
(UL 198G,3AG):6A FAST,250V  
159-0239-00  
159-0210-00  
200-2264-00  
200-2265-00  
5 mm x 20 mm (IEC 127):  
5A(T),250V  
WARNING  
To avoid electrical shock, always unplug the power cord from the  
socket before checking the line fuse.  
2Ć4  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation for Use  
To checkthe fuse, remove the fuse holder on the rear panel. Refer to FigĆ  
ure 2Ć2 for the location of the fuse holder. To remove the fuse holder, turn it  
counterĆclockwise with a screwdriver while pushing it in. Then remove the  
fuse from the fuse holder.  
Consider the following information when you power on or power off the  
AWG2005 or when external power loss occurs.  
Applying and  
Interrupting Power  
PowerĆon Cycle  
At powerĆon, the startĆup diagnostics checkthe AWG2005 operation. The  
startĆup diagnostics take about 30 seconds. If all diagnostic items complete  
without error, the AWG2005 displays PASS on the screen and then changes  
to the SETUP menu.  
If the diagnostics detect an error, the AWG2005 displays FAIL and the error  
code. To exit the diagnostics menu, press any key; then the system displays  
the SETUP menu. See section 6, Maintenance, for information on diagnosĆ  
tics and fault isolation.  
NOTE  
If the ambient temperature goes outside the specified operating  
temperature range, an error occurs during the diagnostics at powĆ  
erĆon. If this happens, power off the AWG2005 and wait until the  
chassis temperature is appropriate; then switch the power on  
again.  
PowerĆoff Cycle  
CAUTION  
To prevent loss of internally stored adjustment constants, DO NOT  
power off the AWG2005 when doing the internal calibration deĆ  
scribed in section 5, Adjustment Procedures.  
Wait for the AWG2005 to finish the operation when doing internal calibration  
or saving waveform or sequence files. Improper powerĆoff or unexpected  
loss of power to the AWG2005 can result in the corruption of data stored in  
nonvolatile memory.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation for Use  
Memory Backup Power  
A lithium battery maintains internal nonvolatile memory, allowing the  
AWG2005 to retain waveformand sequence files if AC power is lost. This  
battery has a shelf life of about three years. Partial or total loss of stored  
information at powerĆon may indicate that the battery needs to be replaced.  
WARNING  
To avoid risk of fire or explosion, replace the AWG2005 battery with  
a lithium battery having the part number listed in section 10, MeĆ  
chanical Parts List. This battery is a safetyĆcontrolled part.  
To avoid risk of fire or explosion, do not recharge, rapidly disĆ  
charge, or disassemble the battery; and do not incinerate the  
battery or heat it above 100°ĂC. Also, dispose of used batteries  
promptly. Small quantities of used batteries can be disposed of in  
normal refuse. Keep lithium batteries away from children.  
Your AWG2005 may include one or more options. To determine which opĆ  
tions are installed, power on the AWG2005 and look at the display during  
the powerĆon sequence. The AWG2005 lists the installed options after OpĆ  
tions, near the top of the display.  
Installed Options  
Table 2Ć1 of this subsection gives information about line cord options. SecĆ  
tion 7, Options, lists other options and optional accessories. For further  
information and prices of options, see your Tektronix Products catalog or  
contact a Tektronix Field Office.  
2Ć6  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Before servicing the AWG2005, read the following operating instructions.  
These instructions are at the level appropriate for servicing the AWG2005.  
The user manual contains complete operator instructions.  
In addition, section 4, Performance Verification, includes instructions for  
making the frontĆpanel settings required to check AWG2005 characteristics.  
To powerĆon the AWG2005, follow these steps:  
How to Power On  
1. Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH (on the back of the AWG2005) to  
the ON position. This switch is the main power switch; it routes power to  
the standby circuit in the AWG2005.  
2. Then, press the ON/STBY (standby) switch on the front (lowerĆleft corĆ  
ner) of the AWG2005. This switch applies power to the remaining circuits  
of the AWG2005. Allow at least 20 minutes for the AWG2005 to warm up.  
WARNING  
To avoid personal shock hazard, turn off both the ON/STBY switch  
and the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH before servicing. The PRINCIĆ  
PAL POWER SWITCH on the rear panel is the true power disconĆ  
nect switch. The ON/STBY (standby) switch simply toggles  
operation on and off. When connected to a power source and when  
the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH is on, the internal power supplies  
and much ofthe other circuitry ofthe AWG2005 remain energized  
regardless ofthe setting ofthe ON/STBY switch.  
To avoid personal shock hazard, set the PRINCIPAL POWER  
SWITCH off before connecting or disconnecting the line cord to or  
from the power source.  
At powerĆon, the AWG2005 performs internal startĆup diagnostics. These  
diagnostics check internal circuit function and report any failures. In addiĆ  
tion, you can initiate internal diagnostics; these diagnostics differ from the  
startĆup diagnostics in that they do more extensive memory checking.  
Internal Diagnostics  
Routines  
The AWG2005 also contains internal calibration routines, which check  
internal circuit function and adjust calibration constants. Run these calibraĆ  
tion routines whenever the AWG2005 undergoes a temperature change. For  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
instance, run the calibration routines after the AWG2005 warms up at powerĆ  
on. This warmup period and subsequent calibration assures AWG2005  
operation at optimum performance levels.  
The AWG2005 uses a combination of frontĆpanel buttons, keys, a knob, and  
onĆscreen menus to control generator functions. Some frontĆpanel controls  
select menus and manipulate menu items. Others enter values and units,  
allow manual triggering, and turn on/off AWG2005 output. OnĆscreen graphĆ  
ics show various aspects of the current AWG2005 configuration.  
User Interface  
OnĆscreen menus set all AWG2005 functions except manual triggering and  
output control. Main menus provide access to lowerĆlevel nested submenus.  
Buttons in the center of the front panel select the main menus.  
When you select a menu, the display shows the items controlled by that  
menu and numeric values currently in effect. Buttons around the display  
select lowerĆlevel menus, change menu selections, modify numeric values  
and units, and execute functions.  
FIgure 2Ć3 contains two examples of AWG2005 displays. To see the first  
display on theAWG2005, press Edit in the MENU column; then press New  
Waveform in thesidemenu. Thesecond display shows an exampleof the  
message area. Text after the illustration describes each display feature.  
Display  
Status Area Ċ Thestatus of theAWG2005 always appears in thestatus  
line. Status information includes the interface status (refer to Programmer  
manual), operating mode status, trigger status (refer to User manual), and  
busy icon (a clock) which appears while loading or saving waveform or  
sequence files.  
Date & Time Display Ċ This area displays thedateand timeset in the  
UTILITY menu. Thedateand timedisplay can beset to on or off.  
Error Display Area Ċ If an error occurs during operation, this area disĆ  
plays an error message.  
Side Menu Label Ċ This area displays a label that matches the bottom  
menu that was selected.  
Side Menu Ċ When you select an item from the bottom menu, the correĆ  
sponding side menu appears on the right side of the screen. To select an  
item, input numerals, or execute functions, push the soft button correspondĆ  
ing to thesidemenu item.  
2Ć8  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Button Operation Ċ This area includes an explanation of front panel  
operation.  
Knob Icon Ċ The knob icon appears next to an item that is selected. To  
change the value of the item use the general purpose knob or press the  
numeric and units keys.  
Message Area Ċ This area displays messages for the user.  
Bottom Menu Ċ Pushing any button of the MENU column or the F.G  
button displays the corresponding bottom menu in the lower part of the  
screen. To select an item from a bottom menu, push the corresponding soft  
button.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Date &  
Time  
Display  
Status Area  
Error  
Display  
Area  
Side  
Menu  
Label  
Side  
Menu  
Button  
Operation  
Knob  
Icon  
Message  
Area  
Bottom  
Menu  
Figure 2Ć3:ăDisplay Features  
2Ć10  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
The AWG2005 operation is primarily controlled by means of menus that  
correspond to the SETUP, MODE, EDIT, LOAD/SAVE and UTILITY buttons in  
the MENU column. To display one of these main menus on the screen, push  
the corresponding button. The button LED indicates which menu is currently  
selected. Refer to the User Manual for more details concerning these meĆ  
nus. The F.G button under the MENU column selects function generator  
operation.  
Menus  
H
SETUP Menu Ċ The SETUP menu sets the following waveform output  
parameters for each channel: clock source and frequency, waveform or  
sequence file selection, operation, filter, amplitude, and offset.  
H
MODE Menu Ċ This menu sets the operation output mode. The  
operation modes are the trigger modes (Cont, Triggered and Gated)  
and the modes which display a waveform in sequence for each trigger  
(Waveform Advance and Autostep modes). This menu also has an item  
for setting the system configure to either master or slave.  
H
EDIT Menu Ċ The EDIT menu allows you to edit an existing file saved  
in internal memory or to create a new file. To modify files in internal  
memory, use one of the four editors, depending on the waveform file  
type: waveform edit, sequence edit, equation edit, and autostep edit.  
Instruments with Option 05 installed also have a clock sweep editor  
which provides linear, log and arbitrary sweep output for clock frequenĆ  
cies. Instrument with Option 09 installed have an FFT editor to permit  
editing in the frequency domain and a convolution editor to operate the  
waveforms convolution in high speed.  
H
H
LOAD/SAVE Menu Ċ Here are the functions for this menu:  
H
H
LOAD menu Ċ loads files from the AWG2005 floppy disk drive or  
nonvolatile internal memory into internal memory.  
SAVE menu Ċ saves files from the AWG2005 internal memory onto  
a floppy disk or into nonvolatile internal memory.  
UTILITY Menu Ċ Use this menu to rename or delete files saved in the  
floppy disk or internal nonvolatile memory, to set the parameters of GPIB  
or RSĆ232ĆC, to set AWG2005 date and time, to change display brightĆ  
ness, to set the catalog order, to set the system configure, to set the  
hardcopy port and format, to check interface status, and to execute  
internal diagnosis and calibration routines.  
The AWG2005 generates waveform output from four different types of waveĆ  
form files:  
Waveform Files  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
H
Waveform data file (filename.WFM). This is the basicwaveform data file.  
It contains the waveform data that the AWG2005 loads into memory and  
reads when generating waveform output. The data in this kind of file can  
be created using the waveform editor, generated from equations made  
using the equation editor, transferred in over an interface, or directly  
transferred in from certain Tektronix instruments. In addition, the waveĆ  
form editor displays the data in a waveform data file in three formats:  
graphical, table, and timing.  
H
H
H
Waveform equation file (filename.EQU). The waveform equation file  
contains equations that express waveform characteristics. Compilation  
of the waveform equation file generates a waveform data file. The  
AWG2005 generates the waveform output from this file.  
Waveform sequence file (filename.SEQ). The waveform sequence file  
specifies a series of waveform data files. When the AWG2005 executes a  
waveform sequence file, it sequentially generates waveforms from each  
waveform data file, in the order specified.  
Waveform autostep file (filename.AST). The waveform autostep file speciĆ  
fies a series of waveform data files and/or waveform sequence files.  
When the AWG2005 executes a waveform autostep file, it generates the  
waveform for the first file specified. Then it waits for a trigger before  
generating from the next specified file. The autostep file includes output  
conditions for each channel.  
The AWG2005 has both internal memory and internal nonvolatile memory  
(NVRam) for waveform file storage. The AWG2005 generates waveforms  
from files residing in internal memory. To save a file that is in internal  
memory, copy it to nonvolatile memory or floppy disk. Only nonvolatile  
memory retains files at powerĆoff.  
Waveform Storage  
and I/O  
The AWG2005 also has a floppyĆdisk drive for loading files from floppy disk  
into internal memory or internal nonvolatile memory and for saving files from  
either memory to floppy disk. The disk drive accepts 3.5Ćinch MSĆDOSĆforĆ  
matted floppy disks.  
The following steps explain how to load files from a floppy disk into internal  
memory.  
Loading Files  
1. Push the LOAD/SAVE button in the MENU column.  
2. Turn the disk so the side with the arrow is on top; insert the disk into the  
AWG2005 floppy disk drive.  
2Ć12  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Destination  
Source  
Figure 2Ć4:ăLOAD Menu  
3. Push the Device button along the bottom menu to select Disk. The  
menu in Figure 2Ć4 appears.  
4. Select the Load All button along the side menu to load all files in the  
root directory on the disk into the AWG2005 internal (volatile) memory.  
Or, turn the generalĆpurpose knob to highlight the file you want to load  
andselect Load. The display indicates which file it is loading. When  
loading is complete, the clock disappears.  
5. Push the floppy drive button and remove the disk from the floppy drive.  
6. Push any button in the MENU column (other than LOAD/SAVE) to exit  
the menu.  
The SETUP menu allows you to set various output parameters for outputting  
a waveform or sequence waveform. To set the output parameters, select a  
waveform or sequence file (that is already loaded into memory) as the active  
file.  
Setting Output  
Parameters  
When you select a file, the AWG2005 changes to the output parameters  
associatedwith the file anddisplays these parameters on the SETUP menu.  
If you modify the displayed output parameters and later save the file, the  
modifiedoutput parameters are savedwith the file. (if the file is locked, you  
cannot modify the file contents.)  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
The following steps go through the process of selecting a file and modifying  
individual output parameters.  
1. Push the SETUP button in the MENU column. The SETUP menu in  
Figure 2Ć5 appears.  
Figure 2Ć5:ăSETUP Menu  
2. Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu. Waveform SeĆ  
quence toggles between the CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files  
(lower list).  
3. Turn the general purpose knob to highlight a file in the displayed list of  
files; these are the files currently in internal memory. Then, push ENTER  
to select the file; the AWG2005 changes to the output parameters  
associated with the file you selected.  
4. After the file is selected, push the front panel VALUE button. Now you  
can modify output waveform parameters.  
5. Setting individual parameters:  
Push the SETUP button in the MENU column (ifthe button is not seĆ  
lected). Now select the appropriate item from the bottom menu; then  
use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to modify the parameter  
setting.  
2Ć14  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
The following explains each item in the bottom menu.  
H
Clock Ċ This item sets the clock source and clock frequency. The  
clock source can be set to either internal or external.  
The clock period is the time between the data points for the waveĆ  
form created. Therefore, the product of the clock period and the  
number of waveform points is the waveform or sequence period. For  
example, if the clock frequency is 1 MHz (period of 1 µs) and there  
are 100 waveform points, the waveform period is displayed as 100  
ms.  
The clock source and clock frequency setting will be applied to all  
channels.  
H
Operation Ċ This item performs an arithmeticoperation between  
the CH1 waveform and CH2 waveform or external waveform, and  
outputs the result at the CH1 output connector. The operations are  
addition (Add, External Add) and multiplication (AM, External AM).  
H
H
H
Filter Ċ This item selects a filter that restricts the frequency band  
for the output channel. Choose a 5, 2, 1 MHz, or 500ĂkHz filter, or  
you can select Through (no filter).  
Ampl Ċ This selection sets the voltage value for the 12Ćbit, fullĆ  
scale, output amplitude on the vertical scale. The amplitude can be  
set in steps of 1ĂmV within the range from 0.05ĂV to 10ĂV.  
Offset Ċ This item sets the offset level of the output waveform. The  
offset can be set in steps of 5ĂmV within the range ±5ĂV.  
Operation Mode Settings  
The MODE menu initiates the waveform output with the output conditions  
set using the SETUP menu.  
1. Push the MODE button in the MENU column. The MODE menu in  
Figure 2Ć6 appears.  
2. Select the operation mode from the bottom menu. The operation modes  
are Cont, Triggered, Gated, Waveform Advance, and Autostep.  
In all modes except Cont, the trigger or gate signal source can be the  
external signal applied to the TRIGGER INPUT connector or can be  
generated by pushing the front panel TRIGGER MANUAL button. The  
following text describes the individual modes.  
H
Cont Mode Ċ When you push the Cont button, the AWG2005  
immediately outputs the specified waveform or sequence waveform  
continuously.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Figure 2Ć6:ăMODE Menu  
H
H
Triggered Mode Ċ Intriggered mode, the AWG2005 outputs the  
specified waveform or sequence waveform once, when a trigger  
occurs.  
Gated Mode Ċ In gated mode, the gate signal controls the waveĆ  
form or sequence output.  
As long as the front panel MANUAL button is pushed, (or the gating  
signal is high) the AWG2005 outputs the specified waveform or  
sequence. When the MANUAL button is released (or the gating  
signal goes low), the waveform output stops. When the MANUAL  
buttonis pushed again, the output resumes from the level at which  
the waveform or sequence output stopped.  
H
Waveform Advance Mode Ċ Whena sequence file has been  
designated in the SETUP menu, Waveform Advance mode is used  
to advance a waveform in sequence each time a trigger is received.  
The waveform output conditions in waveform advance mode can be  
set to either Continuous or Step depending on the selection for the  
Run side menu item.  
2Ć16  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Continuous Ċ In this mode, the first waveform is output over and  
over again for each channel when a trigger signal is received. When  
the next trigger signal is received, output of the first waveform stops  
after the end point of that waveform and then the second waveform  
is output in the same manner. The next waveform is not started at  
the moment a trigger is received, but rather at the completion of the  
previous waveform.  
In this way, waveforms are output for each channel one by one in  
sequence each time a trigger signal is received. When a trigger  
signal is received while output of the last waveform is in progress,  
the output stops at the end point of that waveform and then the  
process begins again from output of the first waveform.  
Step Ċ In this mode, the first waveform is output on each channel  
when a trigger signal is received, but only for the number of times  
set with Repeat in the sequence editor. The next waveform is output  
when the next trigger signal is received. Other operations are the  
same as Continuous output.  
H
Autostep Mode Ċ Use Autostepmode to start an Autostepfile  
created with the EDIT menu Autostepeditor. An Autostepfile stores  
a program that specifies a waveform or sequence file (including  
output parameters) for each channel for each step.  
Autostepmode resembles Waveform Advance mode in which each  
time a trigger is received, the display advances one waveform.  
However, in this mode the output parameters for each waveform  
change as well. The operating mode for each step can be set with  
the waveform output conditions to either Continuous or Step, as in  
the case of Waveform Advance mode. Just as in other operating  
modes, the Autostepmode trigger signal can be generated from the  
external trigger signal or by pressing the front panel MANUAL butĆ  
ton.  
Continuous Ċ In this mode the programmed Step:1 waveform is  
output over and over again when a trigger signal is received. When  
the next trigger signal is received output of the Step:1 waveform  
stops after the end point of that waveform and then the Step:2  
waveform is output in the same manner. The waveform is started at  
the moment a trigger is received.  
In this way, the current waveforms advance for each channel one by  
one in sequence each time a trigger signal is received. When a  
trigger signal is received while output of the last waveform in the  
step is in progress, the output stops at the end point of that waveĆ  
form and then the process begins again from output of the Step:1  
waveform.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
2Ć17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions for Operation  
Step Ċ When a trigger signal is received, the Step:1 waveform for  
each channel is output once. When the next trigger signal is reĆ  
ceived, the Step:2 waveform is output (once). When the next trigger  
signal is received while waveform output is in progress, output stops  
after the end point of that waveform and then the waveform for the  
next step is output.  
3. Set the trigger (gate) conditions for the external trigger (gate) source.  
The external trigger (gate) signal is input from the TRIGGER INPUT  
connector on the front panel. The input impedance is 10 kW and the  
maximum input voltageis "10 V.  
When an operating mode other than Cont is selected, the AWG2005  
displays a side menu for selecting the trigger (gate) conditions for  
the external trigger (gate) source. The following describes each of  
these items.  
H
H
Slope Ċ This item sets the slope for external trigger signals. To  
select a positive or negative slope, push the side menu Slope butĆ  
ton. For a positiveslope, theAWG2005 applies thetrigger at the  
rising edge of the external trigger signal; for a negative slope, the  
trigger is applied at the falling edge of the external trigger signal.  
Polarity (Gated Mode) Ċ This item sets the polarity for the gate  
that outputs the waveform or sequence based on the level of the  
external gate signal. To set the polarity, push the side menu Polarity  
button. For a positivepolarity, theAWG2005 outputs thewaveform  
or sequence waveform while the gate signal level is higher than the  
gate level parameter set with the side menu Level item. For negative  
polarity, waveform output occurs while the gate signal level is lower.  
H
Level Ċ This item sets the external trigger (gate) signal level. To set  
this parameter push the side menu Level button, then use the nuĆ  
meric keys or the general purpose knob to change the value. The  
trigger (gate) level can be set in steps of 0.1ĂV within the range from  
-5.0ĂV to 5.0ĂV.  
2Ć18  
Operating Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Theory of Operation  
This section describes the basic operation ofthe major circuit blocks or  
modules in the AWG2005. Section 9, Diagrams, includes two block diaĆ  
grams and an interconnect diagram. Figure 9Ć1 shows the modules and  
functional blocks of the AWG2005 with Option 02, 04, 05 and 09 installed.  
Figure 9Ć2 shows how the modules interconnect.  
The module overview describes the basic operation ofeach functional circuit  
block.  
Module Overview  
The AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is a portable, twoĆ or fourĆ  
channel instrument. For each channel, the AWG2005 reads the digital waveĆ  
form data loaded into its waveform memory. The point rate clock determines  
the rate at which the data is read. The AWG2005 converts the data from  
digital to analog format and outputs the resulting arbitrary waveform.  
Clock Oscillator(A1 Clock Board)  
The clock circuit is a PLL oscillator that uses a 12.8 MHz reference crystal. It  
supplies a point rate clock that is adjustable from 20 MHz to 0.01 Hz for  
reading data from channel waveform memory.  
When an external clock source is selected, the external clock signal is  
passed directly through to the Clock board and used for reading waveform  
data in memory.  
Clock Sweep Oscillator(A31 Clock Sweep Board)  
In addition to the description for the Clock Sweep Oscillator, it provides the  
clock sweep from 20 MHz to 0.03 Hz.  
Sequencer(A2 AWG Board)  
This sequencer block controls the waveform memory addresses read out  
according to the contents ofa sequence file.  
Waveform Memory (A2 AWG Board)  
This functional block contains the memory that holds the waveform digital  
data. There are 12 bits for waveform data and one bit for waveform markers  
(for each channel).  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
3Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Theory of Operation  
DigitalĆtoĆAnalog Converter (DAC) (A11 D/A Board)  
This functional block is a 12Ćbit highĆspeed digitalĆtoĆanalog converter. It  
converts the digital data from the waveform memory into analog signals.  
Analog Processing (A3/A23 Analog Board)  
This analog processing block amplifies the analog signals from the DAC to  
the necessary amplitude. If an offset is specified, this circuit adds that offset  
and outputs the result at the output connector for that channel. This circuit  
also contains a filter, an AM modulator, and other elements that modify  
waveform output. Its output impedance is 50 W.  
CPU and Memory (A6 CPU Board)  
This functional block directs operation of all internal circuits, based on front  
panel control operation and commands received over the GPIB or RSĆ232ĆC  
interface. This circuit includes the 68000 CPU, DRAM, EPROM, SRAM. Data  
in memory is retained by a lithium battery on the A5 Backplane board.  
CAUTION  
To avoid losing waveformdata files stored in NVRam, save the files  
to a floppy disk before removing the A6 CPU board or A5 BackĆ  
plane board. Then restore the files fromfloppy disk to AWG2005  
NVRamafter reinstalling the board(s).  
GPIB (A6 CPU Board)  
This functional block is the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) interface  
driver, which controls communication with external devices over the parallel  
interface. The GPIB connector is on the rear panel.  
RSĆ232ĆC (A6 CPU Board)  
This functional block is the RSĆ232ĆC interface circuit which controls serial  
communication with external devices over the RSĆ232ĆC interface. The  
RSĆ232ĆC interface connector is on the rear panel.  
Display Control (A6 CPU Board)  
The display control block processes the test and waveform information  
based on commands from the processor. The block sends the text and  
waveform information to the display monitor as video signals with vertical  
and horizontal sync control.  
3Ć2  
Theory of Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Theory of Operation  
Display Monitor  
The display monitor takes in the video signals and displays them on a  
17.8Ăcm (7 in.) CRT screen. The display resolution is 480 640 pixels.  
Front Panel (A12 Key Board)  
The front panel block includes the buttons, keys, knobs, and so on, for  
entering selections. User selections from the front panel are sent to the  
processor. The buttons at the bottom and side of the display are also inĆ  
cluded in this block. Commands from the processor control the LED in the  
buttons.  
Floppy Disk Drive  
The 3.5Ćinch floppy disk drive supports both 2DD and 2HD MSĆDOS forĆ  
mats.  
Low Voltage Power Supply  
This functional block is a switchingĆtype power supply that converts the line  
voltage into the various voltages required for internal circuit operation.  
Fan  
The fan prevents heat buildĆup inside the cabinet; it pulls air into the right  
(floppyĆdisk) side of the AWG2005 and exhausts it out the left side.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
3Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Theory of Operation  
The following four options which modify AWG2005 operation are available.  
Options  
H
Option 02: CH3 and CH4 Output Channels  
This option adds CH3 and CH4 waveform output channels. It includes  
an AWG board, a D/A board and an Analog board for Channel 3 and 4.  
H
Option 04: Digital Data Out  
This option directly outputs the digital data in the waveform memory  
without passing it through the digitalĆtoĆanalog converter. This option  
and Option 09 cannot both be installed.  
H
H
Option 05: Clock Sweep  
This option provides an additional function: the clock sweep editor. In  
addition to performing linear sweep and log sweep for the clock freĆ  
quency, the clock sweep editor enables you to easily create arbitrary  
sweep. The Clock board for the AWG2005 standard type is replaced by  
the Clock Sweep board.  
Option 09: Floating Point Processor  
This option is a card dedicated to floating point processing. It provides  
the capability to edit in the frequency domain and it speeds up internal  
calculations.  
For more information about these and other options, see section 7, Options.  
3Ć4  
Theory of Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Verification  
This subsection describes the kind of verification procedures that can be  
followed, it indicates when to use the procedures, and gives conventions  
used in their structure. The procedures in this section are:  
H
H
Self Tests  
Performance Tests  
These procedures verify the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator funcĆ  
tionality. Which procedure to follow depends on your goal:  
Preparation  
H
To quickly confirm that the AWG2005 functions correctly and was adĆ  
justed properly, do the procedures under Self Tests, which begin on  
page 4Ć3.  
Advantages: These procedures are short, require no external equipĆ  
ment, and perform extensive functional and accuracy testing. Use them  
to quickly determine if the AWG2005 is suitable for putting into service,  
such as when it is first received.  
H
For a more extensive confirmation of performance, do the Performance  
Tests, beginning on page 4Ć7 after doing the Self Tests.  
Advantages: These procedures involve direct checking of warranted  
specifications. They require more time and suitable test equipment. (See  
Equipment Required on page 4Ć8.  
Before starting any of these procedures, read Instructions for Operation in  
section 2 of this manual. These instructions briefly describe the AWG2005  
frontĆpanel controls and menu system. The user manual contains detailed  
information on operating the AWG2005.  
Throughout the procedures in this section the following conventions apply:  
Conventions  
H
Each test procedure uses the following general format:  
H
H
H
H
Title of Test  
Equipment Required  
Prerequisites  
Procedure  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Verification  
H
Each procedure consists of as many steps, substeps, and subparts as  
required to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are sequenced  
as follows:  
1. First Step  
a. First Substep  
H
H
First Subpart  
Second Subpart  
b. Second Substep  
2. Second Step  
H
H
Instructions for menu selection follow this format: FRONT PANEL BUTĆ  
TON! Main Menu Button! Side Menu Button. Forexample, Press  
UTILITY! Misc! Config...! Reset to Factory! O.K."  
Where instructed to use a frontĆpanel button, key, or knob, or select  
from the MENU column, or from a bottom or side menu, the name of the  
item appears in boldface type: push MODE, " orselect Triggered in  
the bottom menu."  
4Ć2  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self Tests  
This subsection describes how to use AWG2005 internal selfĆtest routines.  
No equipment is required to do these procedures. The self tests include  
these internal routines:  
H
Diagnostics  
This selfĆtest procedure uses internal routines to verify that the  
AWG2005 functions, and passes the internal circuit tests.  
H
Calibration  
The second procedure checks the AWG2005 internal calibration  
constants and changes them if needed.  
The internal diagnostic routines check AWG2005 characteristics such as  
amplitude, offset, trigger level, clock, filters and attenuation.  
Diagnostics  
The AWG2005 automatically performs the internal diagnostics at powerĆon;  
you can also run the internal diagnostics using the menu selections deĆ  
scribed in this procedure. The difference between these two methods of  
initiating the diagnostics is that the menu method does more detailed  
memory checking than the powerĆon method.  
Equipment Required: None.  
Prerequisites: Power on the AWG2005 and allow a twentyĆminute warmup  
period before doing this procedure.  
Procedure:  
1. Verify that internal diagnostics pass: Do the following substeps to verify  
passing internal diagnostics.  
a. Display the diagnostics menu and select all tests: Push  
UTILITY! Diag/Cal! Diagnostics xxxx! All. See the menu in  
Figure 4Ć1.  
The Diagnostics column on the left shows the tests available for  
diagnostics. In addition to selecting all of the tests shown for DiagĆ  
nostics, you can select only the test(s) you want to run using the  
general purpose knob. In Figure 4Ć1, the symbol to the left of Cpu  
indicates that test is one of the tests selected.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self Tests  
Figure 4Ć1:ăDiagnostics Menu  
b. Run the diagnostics: Select Execute from the side menu. This  
executes all the AWG2005 diagnostics automatically.  
c. Wait: The internal diagnostics do an extensive verification of  
AWG2005 functions. While this verification progresses, the screen  
displays the clock icon. When finished, the resultingstatus appears  
on the screen.  
d. Confirm that no failures are found: Verify that no failures are found  
and reported onĆscreen. If the diagnostics displays FAIL as the result  
of any test, use the instructions in section 6, Troubleshooting, to  
identify the faulty module. If the diagnostics display an error code,  
contact your nearest representative.  
2. Return to regular service: Push a button (other than UTILITY) in the  
MENU column to exit the diagnostic menu.  
4Ć4  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self Tests  
The AWG2005 includes internal calibration routines that check electrical  
Calibration  
characteristics such as amplitude, offset, trigger level, clock, filters and  
attenuation and adjust internal calibration constants as necessary. This  
procedure describes how to do the internal calibration.  
Equipment Required: None.  
Prerequisites: Power on the AWG2005 and allow a 20 minute warmup  
period at an ambient temperature between +15°C and +25°C before doing  
this procedure.  
Procedure:  
NOTE  
If the AWG2005 is powered off while the calibration is executed the  
calibration data in the memory may be loss.  
1. Verify that internal adjustments pass: Do the following substeps to verify  
internal adjustments have passed.  
a. Display the calibrations menu and select all tests: Push  
UTILITY! Diag/Cal! Calibrations xxxx! All. See the menu in  
Figure 4Ć2.  
The Calibrations column on the left shows the tests available for  
calibration. In addition to selecting all of the tests shown, you can  
select only the test(s) you want to run using the general purpose  
knob. In Figure 4Ć2, the symbol to the left of Trigger indicates the  
tests selected.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self Tests  
Figure 4Ć2:ăCalibrations Menu  
b. Run the adjustments routine: Select Execute from the side menu.  
This executes the AWG2005 calibration routines automatically.  
c. Wait: The internal calibration does an exhaustive verification of  
proper AWG2005 function. While this verification progresses, the  
clock icon appears on screen. When finished, the resultingstatus  
will appear on the screen.  
d. Confirm that no failures are found: Verify that no failures are found  
and reported onĆscreen. If the calibration displays FAIL as the result,  
use the instructions in section 6, Troubleshooting, to identify the  
faulty module. If an error code is displayed, contact the nearest  
Tektronix representative.  
2. Return to regular service: Push any button (other than UTILITY) in the  
MENU column to exit the calibration menu.  
4Ć6  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
This subsection contains a series of procedures for checking that the  
AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator performs as warranted.  
The procedures are arranged in eleven logical groupings, presented in the  
following order:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Operating Mode Checks  
Arithmetic Operation Checks  
Clock Frequency and Amplitude Checks  
Gain Accuracy Check  
Offset Accuracy Check  
Pulse Response Check  
MARKER OUT Amplitude Check  
CONTROL SIG OUT Amplitude Check  
External Trigger Level Accuracy Check  
External CLOCK IN Check  
Master-Slave Operation Check (Optional Check)  
DIGITAL DATA OUT Check  
These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the internal  
diagnostic and calibration routines described on page 4Ć3.  
The tests in this subsection comprise an extensive, valid confirmation of  
performance and functionality, when the following requirements are met:  
Prerequisites  
H
You must have performed and passed the calibration procedure deĆ  
scribed in Self Tests, the previous subsection.  
NOTE  
For operation to specified accuracy, allow the AWG2005 to warm  
up at least 20 minutes before doing the performance tests.  
H
Load all the files from the Performance Check disk (063Ć1706ĆXX) that  
comes with this manual into AWG2005 internal memory. For instructions  
on loading files, see Loading Files on pageĂ 2Ć12 in the Instructions for  
Operation subsection in section 2.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Related Information  
Read Preparation and Conventions on page 4Ć1. Also, if you are not familiar  
with operating the AWG2005, read the subsection, Instructions for OperaĆ  
tion, in section 2 before doing any of these procedures.  
Equipment Required  
The following equipment is required to check the performance of the  
AWG2005.  
TableĂ4Ć1:ăTest Equipment  
Item Description  
Minimum Requirements  
Example  
Purpose  
Precision  
termination  
Impedance: 50Ă, 0.1%  
Connectors: BNC  
Tektronix Part 011Ć0129ĆXX  
Signal termination.  
Adapter  
Connectors: BNC femaleĆtoĆ  
dual banana  
Tektronix Part 103Ć0090ĆXX  
Tektronix Part 103Ć0030ĆXX  
Tektronix Part 012Ć0057ĆXX  
Signal  
interconnection.  
BNC dual input  
(TEE) adapter  
Connectors: BNC  
Signal  
interconnection.  
BNC cable  
(4 required)  
Impedance 50ĂΩ  
Connectors: BNC  
Length: 43 inches  
Signal  
interconnection.  
Digital Data Out  
Cable (Option 04)  
Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 174Ć3192ĆXX  
Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 131Ć3847ĆXX  
Used to check  
digital data output .  
2 X13 header  
(Option 04)  
Used to check  
digital data output.  
Probe, 10X  
(Option 04)  
10X probe  
Tektronix Part P6139A  
Used to check  
digital data output.  
Test  
oscilloscope  
Bandwidth: >250ĂMHz  
Tektronix TDS500 Series DigitizĆ Checks output  
ing Oscilloscope or 2400 Series signals. Used in  
Digitizing Oscilloscope  
many procedures.  
Frequency  
counter  
Frequency range:  
10ĂHz to 250ĂMHz  
Tektronix DC 5010 ProgramĆ  
mable Universal Counter/Timer  
Used to check clock  
frequency.  
*
Digital  
multimeter  
DC volts range:  
0.05ĂV to 10ĂV  
Accuracy: ±0.1%  
Output voltage:  
-5ĂV to 5ĂV  
Fluke 8842A  
Used throughout the  
checks to measure  
voltage.  
Function  
generator  
Tektronix FG 5010 ProgramĆ  
*
Used to input the  
trigger signal.  
mable Function Generator  
Performance Check Must use example listed  
disk  
Tektronix Part 063Ć1706ĆXX  
Used throughout the  
checks to provide  
waveform files.  
*
Requires a TM 5000 Series Power Module Mainframe  
4Ć8  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
TableĂ4Ć2:ăTest Equipment For Optional Check  
Item Description  
Minimum Requirements  
Example  
Purpose  
Arbitrary  
Waveform  
Generator  
Must use example listed  
Tektronix AWG2005 Arbitrary  
Waveform Generator  
Used to check masĆ  
ter-slave operation.  
Table 4Ć3 lists the waveform files on the Performance Check disk  
(063Ć1706ĆXX) that are used in these performance tests, the AWG2005  
frontĆpanel settings that each file sets up, and the performance test that  
uses each file.  
Performance Check  
Files  
NOTE  
The files on the Performance Check disk are locked (the files  
names are displayed with *), so the data in these files cannot be  
changed unless the lock is opened. The file data includes not only  
waveformdata, but also output parameters.  
When you select a file with the WaveformSequence item, the  
AWG2005 output parameters change to those specified in the file,  
and the waveformoutput reflects waveformdata in the file. After  
selecting a file, do not change an output parameter with the SETUP  
menu unless a procedure instructs you to do so. During the proceĆ  
dures, if you are unsure that the AWG2005 settings still match the  
file's settings, select the waveformagain using the Waveform  
Sequence itemon the SETUP menu.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
TableĂ4Ć3:ăFile List for Performance Check Disk  
EDIT Menu  
Wfm Wfm  
SETUP Menu  
No. File Name  
Usage  
Clock  
Operation Filter  
Ampl  
Offset  
Shape Point  
ă1  
ă2  
MODE.WFM  
Cont Mode,  
Triggered  
Mode,  
1000  
10ĂMHz  
Normal  
Normal  
Through 1ĂV  
0ĂV  
Gated Mode  
MODE_ADV.SEQ  
ADVĆ1.WFM  
ADVĆ2.WFM  
1200  
1000  
ă200  
Waveform  
Advance  
Mode  
10ĂMHz  
Through 1ĂV  
0ĂV  
ă3  
ă
MODE_AST.AST  
Step: 1 ASTĆ1.WFM  
Autostep  
Mode  
1000  
10ĂMHz  
5ĂMHz  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Through 3ĂV  
Through 1.5ĂV  
Through 0.5ĂV  
Through 5ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
Step: 2 ASTĆ2.WFM  
Step: 3 ASTĆ3.WFM  
ă
200  
ă200  
1000  
20ĂMHz  
ă4  
OPE.AST  
Step: 1  
EXT_AM.WFM  
External AM  
Operation  
ăă1ĂMHz Ext AM  
(CH1)  
Step: 1  
------  
(CH2)  
(CH1)  
Step: 2  
AMĆ1.WFM  
Internal AM  
Operation  
1000  
ăă1ĂMHz AM  
Through 5ĂV  
0ĂV  
Step:2  
AMĆ2.WFM  
(CH2)  
(CH1)  
(CH2)  
(CH1)  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
ăă1ĂMHz ---  
ăă1ĂMHz AM  
Through 10ĂV  
Through 5ĂV  
Through 10ĂV  
Through 5ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
Step: 3  
AMĆ1.WFM  
Step:3  
AMĆ3.WFM  
ăă1ĂMHz ---  
ăă1ĂMHz Ext ADD  
Step: 4  
ADD.WFM  
External ADD  
Operation  
Step: 4  
-------  
(CH2)  
(CH1)  
Step: 5  
ADD.WFM  
Internal Add  
Operation  
1000  
1000  
ăă1ĂMHz Add  
ăă1ĂMHz ---  
Through 5ĂV  
Through 5ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
Step:5  
ADD.WFM  
(CH2)  
4Ć10  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
TableĂ4Ć3:ăFile List for Performance Check Disk (Cont.)  
EDIT Menu  
SETUP Menu  
No. File Name  
Usage  
Wfm  
Wfm  
Clock  
Operation Filter  
Ampl  
Offset  
Shape Point  
ă5  
CLK_FREQ.WFM  
Clock  
Frequency  
Accuracy  
1000  
20ĂMHz Normal  
Through 1ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
ă6  
ă7  
CLK_AMPL.WFM  
Clock  
Amplitude  
1000  
1000  
1000  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
Through 1ĂV  
GAIN.AST (CH1-CH4)  
Step: 1 GAINĆ1.WFM  
Gain  
Accuracy  
Through 0.999ĂV 0ĂV  
Step: 2 GAINĆ2.WFM  
Through -0.999 0ĂV  
V
Step: 3 GAINĆ3.WFM  
Step: 4 GAINĆ4.WFM  
1000  
1000  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
Through 10ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
Through -10ĂV  
8
OFF.AST (CH1-CH4)  
Step: 1 OFFSETĆ1.WFM  
Offset  
Accuracy  
1000  
1000  
1000  
ăă64  
ă200  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
20ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
Through 0.05ĂV  
Through 0.05ĂV  
Through 0.05ĂV  
Through 0.5ĂV  
Through 1ĂV  
5ĂV  
Step: 2 OFFSETĆ2.WFM  
Step: 3 OFFSETĆ3.WFM  
PULSE.WFM  
0ĂV  
-5ĂV  
0ĂV  
ă9  
10  
Pulse  
Response  
MKR.WFM  
MARKER  
OUT AmpliĆ  
tude  
0ĂV  
11  
12  
13  
CNTRL.WFM  
TRG_IN.WFM  
EXT_CLK.WFM  
CONTROL  
SIG OUT AmĆ  
plitude  
ă200  
1000  
1000  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
Through 1ĂV  
Through 1ĂV  
Through 1ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
0ĂV  
External TrigĆ  
ger Level AcĆ  
curacy  
20ĂMHz  
Normal  
Normal  
External  
Clock  
External  
CLOCK IN  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
TableĂ4Ć3:ăFile List for Performance Check Disk (Cont.)  
EDIT Menu  
SETUP Menu  
No. File Name  
Usage  
Wfm  
Wfm  
Clock  
Operation Filter  
Ampl  
Offset  
Shape Point  
14  
15  
MS_SL.WFM  
Master-Slave  
Operation  
Check (OpĆ  
tional Check)  
ă200  
4096  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
ăă1ĂMHz Normal  
Through 1ĂV  
0ĂV  
DIGI_OUT.WFM  
DIGITAL  
Through 1ĂV  
0ĂV  
DATA OUT  
Check  
(Option 04)  
These procedures check operation of the Cont, Triggered, Gated, Waveform  
Advance, and Autostep modes.  
OperatingMode  
Checks  
Check Cont Mode  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Operating modes, Continuous, on  
pageĂ1Ć5.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 must meet the prerequisites listed on  
page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output  
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input conĆ  
nector on the oscilloscope (see Figure 4Ć3).  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć3:ăCont Mode Initial Test Hookup  
4Ć12  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical:  
CH1  
DC  
CH1 coupling:  
CH1 scale  
CH1 input impedance:  
0.2ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
-100ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select the file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform  
files and highlight the MODE.WFM file.  
Push ENTER to select the file. This button is located to the  
lowerĆright of the numeric keypad.  
Select the MODE.WFM file for CH2 same as CH1.  
3. Turnonthe AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED  
above the CH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check against limits: Check that the amplitude of the sine wave disĆ  
played on the oscilloscope is 5 vertical divisions and that 5 cycles of the  
waveform are displayed.  
5. Move the connection for the coaxial cable from the AWG2005 CH1  
output to AWG2005 CH2 output connector.  
6. Turnonthe AWG2005 CH2 output: Push the CH2 button so that the LED  
above the CH2 output connector is on.  
7. Repeat procedure 2.  
8. If Option 02 is installed (adds CH3 and CH4 output channels): Repeat  
this procedure for CH3 and CH4 outputs.  
9. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Check Triggered Mode  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Operating modes, Triggered, on  
pageĂ1Ć5.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output  
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input conĆ  
nector on the oscilloscope.  
b. Hook up the function generator:  
H
Connect the AWG2005 TRIGGER INPUT connector though a  
coaxial cable to the function generator output connector (see  
Figure 4Ć4).  
Function Generator  
FG 5010  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć4:ăTriggered Mode Initial Test Hookup  
c. Set the oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical:  
CH1  
DC  
CH1 coupling:  
CH1 scale  
CH1 input impedance:  
0.2ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50õs/div.  
4Ć14  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Trigger  
Source  
CH1  
DC  
Coupling  
Slope  
Level  
Positive  
-100ĂmV  
Auto  
Mode  
d. Set the function generator controls:  
Function  
Mode  
Square  
Continuous  
Parameter  
Frequency  
Amplitude  
Offset  
1ĂkHz  
4ĂV  
2ĂV  
Output  
Off  
2. Set AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Modify the AWG2005 default settings:  
H
H
Push MODE! Triggered! Slope to select Positive slope.  
Select Level from the side menu and turn the general purpose  
knob to select a 1ĂV trigger level.  
c. Select the file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Highlight the MODE.WFM file using the general purpose knob.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Turn on the AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED  
above the CH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check triggered mode with manual triggering: Push the AWG2005  
MANUAL TRIGGER button and check that when the button is pushed,  
the oscilloscope displays a oneĆcycle sine wave.  
5. Check triggered mode with external triggering:  
a. Change the oscilloscope trigger mode to Normal.  
b. Enable function generator output: Turn on the function generator  
output.  
c. Check triggering: Check that for each trigger supplied by the funcĆ  
tion generator, the oscilloscope displays a oneĆcycle sine wave.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
6. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output, and disconnect  
the function generator and oscilloscope.  
Check Gated Mode  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Operating modes, Gated, on  
pageĂ1Ć5.  
Equipment Required: Three 50Ăcoaxial cables, a 50 precision terĆ  
mination, a function generator, and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output  
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input conĆ  
nector on the oscilloscope.  
b. Hook up the function generator: Connect the function generator  
output to both the AWG2005 TRIGGER INPUT and the oscilloscope  
CH2 input through a coaxial cable and a dual input coupler (see  
Figure 4Ć5).  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Function Generator  
FG 5010  
Figure 4Ć5:ăGated Mode Initial Test Hookup  
c. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1  
DC  
CH1 coupling  
CH1 scale  
CH1 input impedance  
0.5ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
4Ć16  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
200õs/div.  
Trigger  
SourceCH1  
Coupling  
SlopePositive  
Level  
DC  
500ĂmV  
ModeAuto  
d. Set function generator controls:  
Function  
Square  
ModeContinuous  
Parameter  
Frequency  
Amplitude4.0 V  
Offset  
1ĂkHz  
2.0 V  
Off  
Output  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Modify the AWG2005 default settings:  
H
c. Selectht e file:  
Push MODE! Gated! Polarity to highlight Positive.  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Highlight the MODE.WFM file, using the general purpose knob.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Turn on the AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that theLED  
abovetheCH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check gated mode with manual trigger: Push and hold theAWG2005  
MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that theoscilloscopecontinuĆ  
ously displays a sinewavewhilethe MANUAL TRIGGER button is  
pushed.  
5. Check gated mode with gate signal:  
a. Change the oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1 coupling  
CH1 scale0.5ĂV/div.  
CH1  
DC  
CH1 input impedance  
50ĂΩ  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Trigger  
Source  
CH1  
b. Apply gate signal: Turn function generator output on.  
c. Check gated mode with positive gate signal: Checkthat the oscilloĆ  
scope displays a sine wave while the function generator gate signal  
level is in upper portion of the display (see Figure 4Ć6).  
Waveform  
Output  
CH1  
Gate  
Signal  
CH2  
Figure 4Ć6:ăRelationship between 1 Volt or Greater Gate Signal and  
WaveformOutput Signal  
d. Change the AWG2005 trigger polarity to negative: Push MODE! PoĆ  
larity to change the polarity to Negative.  
e. Check gated mode with a negative gate signal: Checkthat the  
oscilloscope displays a sine wave while the function generator gate  
signal level is in the lower portion of the display.  
6. End procedure: Turn the function generator output off and disconnect  
the function generator.  
Check WaveformAdvance Mode  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Operating modes, Waveform AdĆ  
vance, on pageĂ1Ć5.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
4Ć18  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output  
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input conĆ  
nector on the oscilloscope (see Figure 4Ć7).  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć7:ăWaveform Advance Mode Initial Test Hookup  
b. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1 coupling  
CH1  
CH1  
DC  
0.2ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
CH1 input impedance  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
0ĂV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Set AWG2005 controls:  
H
H
H
Push MODE! Waveform Advance! Slope to highlight PosiĆ  
tive.  
Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose  
knob to select a 1.0ĂV level.  
Check that the side menu Run highlights Continuous. IfnecesĆ  
sary, push Run to select Continuous.  
c. Select waveform file:  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Highlight the MODE_ADV.SEQ file using the general purpose  
knob.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Turn on the AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED  
above the CH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check waveform advance: Repeatedly push the AWG2005 MANUAL  
TRIGGER button, and check that the oscilloscope displays a continuous  
sine wave that switches between two frequencies at each manual trigĆ  
ger.  
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.  
CheckAutostep Mode  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Operating mode, Autostep, on  
pageĂ1Ć5.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope:  
H
H
Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output through a coaxial cable to  
the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input.  
Connect the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CH1 MARKER OUT output  
through a coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH2 vertical input  
(see Figure 4Ć8). The CH1 MARKER OUT signal will serve as an  
external trigger signal for the oscilloscope.  
4Ć20  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć8:ăAutostep Mode Initial Test Hookup  
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1  
DC  
CH1 coupling  
CH1 scale  
CH1 input impedance  
0.5ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH2  
DC  
Positive  
100ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Modify AWG2005 default settings:  
H
H
H
Push MODE! Autostep! Slope to highlight Positive.  
Push Run from the side menu to highlight Continuous.  
Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose  
knob to select 1ĂV.  
H
H
Select Select Autostep File from the side menu.  
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE_AST.AST  
file.  
H
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Check autostep mode: Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button  
and checkthat the oscilloscope momentarily displays a sine wave with a  
different frequency and amplitude each time you push the button.  
4. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
These procedures check operation of external AM, external ADD, internal  
AM and internal Add arithmeticfunctions.  
Arithmetic Operation  
Checks  
NOTE  
The arithmetic operation checks are structured as a continuous  
series of tests. After Check External AM Operation, each test uses  
the control settings from the last test and uses the next step in the  
autostep file.  
Check External AM Operation  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: External amplitude modulation,  
pageĂ1Ć13.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a 50 terminator, a  
function generator, and a digital multimeter (DMM).  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output through a coaxial  
cable, the 50 terminator, and BNCĆtoĆdual banana connector to  
the DMM INPUT connector.  
b. Hook up function generator: Connect the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CH1  
AM IN input through a coaxial cable to the function generator output  
(see Figure 4Ć9).  
4Ć22  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Function Generator  
FG 5010  
AWG2005  
AWG2005  
DMM  
8842A  
Figure 4Ć9:ăExternal AM Operation Initial Test Hookup  
c. Set DMM controls:  
Mode  
VDC  
20  
Range  
Inputs  
Front  
d. Set function generator controls:  
Function  
Mode  
Square  
Continuous  
Parameter  
Frequency  
Amplitude  
Offset  
1ĂkHz  
0ĂV  
1ĂV  
Output  
Off  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Modify AWG2005 default settings:  
H
c. Select waveform file:  
Push MODE! Autostep.  
H
H
H
Select Select Autostep File from the side menu.  
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the OPE.AST file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
3. Enable the function generator output: Turn on the function generator  
output.  
4. Check external AM operation:  
H
Check that the step number displayed on the AWG2005 MODE  
menu is Step: 1 (see Figure 4Ć10). If it is not, push MANUAL TRIGĆ  
GER to step though the autostep file steps until Step 1 is displayed.  
Step Display  
Figure 4Ć10:ăMODE Menu Autostep Setting  
H
H
H
Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 2.375 to 2.625ĂV  
(100% modulation).  
Set the function generator offset value to 0ĂV. Check that the DMM  
reading is in the range from 1.125 to 1.375ĂV (50% modulation).  
Set the function generator offset value to -1ĂV. Check that the DMM  
voltage reading is in the range from -0.125 to 0.125ĂV (0% modulaĆ  
tion).  
5. End procedure: Keep the test connections and instrument settings for  
the next check.  
4Ć24  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Check Internal AM Operation  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Arithmetic Operation, Amplitude  
Modulation, on pageĂ1Ć13.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
a digital multimeter (DMM).  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Use test hookup and control settings from previous check.  
2. Check internal AM operation:  
a. Check Autostep Step 2:  
H
H
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the step changes to Step 2 on the MODE menu.  
Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 2.375Ăto  
2.625ĂVDC.  
b. Check Autostep Step 3:  
H
H
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the Autostep changes to Step 3 on the MODE menu.  
Check that the DMM reading is in the range from -2.625Ăto  
-2.375ĂV.  
3. End procedure: Retain the test hookup and settings for the next check.  
Check External ADD Operation  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Arithmetic Operation, Ext Add, on  
pageĂ1Ć13.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
a digital multimeter (DMM).  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up function generator: Move the connection for the coaxial  
cable from rearĆpanel CH1 AM IN to CH1 ADD IN connector. (see  
Figure 4Ć9).  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
b. Set function generator controls:  
Function  
Mode  
Square  
Continuous  
Parameter  
Frequency  
Amplitude  
Offset  
1ĂkHz  
0ĂV  
5.0ĂVĂ  
1
(The actual voltage out is / of what is displayed.)  
2
Output  
Off  
2. Enable the function generator output: Turn on the function generator  
output.  
3. Check external ADD operation:  
a. Check Autostep Step 4:  
H
H
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, andcheck that  
the step changes to Step 4 on the MODE menu.  
Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 4.750 to  
5.250ĂV.  
4. Disable function generator output: Turn the function generator output off.  
5. End procedure: Keep the test connections andinstrument settings for  
the next check.  
Check Internal Add Operation  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Arithmetic Operation, Add, on  
pageĂ1Ć13.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
a digital multimeter (DMM).  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listedon page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Use test hookup and control settings from previous check.  
2. Check internal ADD operation:  
a. Check Autostep Step 5:  
H
H
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, andcheck that  
the step changes to Step 5 on the MODE menu.  
Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 4.750 to  
5.250ĂV.  
4Ć26  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
3. End procedure: Remove equipment: Disconnect connections to the test  
equipment.  
These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG2005 clock frequency and  
the waveform output amplitude.  
Clock Frequency and  
Amplitude Checks  
Check Clock Frequency Accuracy  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Clock Generator, Accuracy, on  
pageĂ1Ć11.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable and a frequency counter.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up frequency counter: Connect the AWG2005 rear panel  
CLOCK OUT connector to the frequency counter input through a  
coaxial cable (see Figure 4Ć11).  
Frequency Counter  
DC 5010  
AWG2005  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć11:ăClock Frequency Accuracy Initial Test Hookup  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
b. Set frequencycounter controls:  
CHANNEL A  
Termination  
Slope  
50ĂΩ  
Negative  
X5  
Attenuation  
Coupling  
DC  
FREQ A  
2. Set AWG2005 controls and select the waveform:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set toFactory ! O.K.  
b. Select the waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to select the CLK_FREQ.WFM  
file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Check clock frequencyaccuracy:  
a. Check clock frequencyaccuracyat current clock frequencysetting:  
Check that the frequency counter reading falls between  
19.9999ĂMHz and 20.001ĂMHz (between 19.9999 MHz and  
20.0001 MHz for the instrument with Option 05).  
b. Check clock frequencyaccuracyfor different clock frequencysetĆ  
tings:  
H
H
H
H
Select Clock from the bottom of the SETUP menu.  
Push Source from the side menu to highlight Internal.  
Select Internal Clock from the side menu.  
Turn the general purpose knob (or press the numericand units  
keys, and push ENTER) to select the first clock frequency listed  
in Table 4Ć4.  
H
H
Check that the frequency counter reading is within the frequenĆ  
cy range listed in the table for the clock frequency setting (refer  
to right column in the table for the instrument with Option 05).  
Repeat this step for each clock frequency and frequency range  
listed in Table 4Ć4.  
4Ć28  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
TableĂ4Ć4:ăClock Frequency Accuracy  
Clock Frequency  
10ĂMHz  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range (Option 05)  
9.99995ĂMHz - 10.00005ĂMHz  
9.9995ĂMHz - 10.0005ĂMHz  
0.99995ĂMHz 1.00005ĂMHz  
0.99995ĂkHz - 1.00005ĂkHz  
9.9995ĂHz - 10.0005ĂHz  
1ĂMHz  
0.999995ĂMHz 1.000005ĂMHz  
0.999995ĂkHz - 1.000005ĂkHz  
9.99995ĂHz - 10.00005ĂHz  
1ĂkHz  
10ĂHz  
4. End procedure: Disconnect the frequency counter.  
Check Clock Amplitude  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Outputs, Clock, Amplitude,  
on pageĂ1Ć14.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CLOCK  
OUT connector through a coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1  
vertical input (see Figure 4Ć12).  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć12:ăClock Amplitude Initial Test Hookup  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
b. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1  
DC  
Coupling  
Scale  
Input impedance  
500ĂmV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
500Ăns/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
500ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select the waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knobto select the CLK_AMPL.WFM  
file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Turn on the AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED  
above the CH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check clock amplitude accuracy: Check that the pulse amplitude of the  
displayed waveform is 2 V or greater.  
pĆp  
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.  
This procedure checks the accuracy of the AWG2005 gain.  
Gain Accuracy Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Main Output, Amplitude, DC AccuĆ  
racy, on pageĂ1Ć12.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable, a 50 termination, a BNCĆtoĆ  
dual banana adapter, and a digital multimeter (DMM).  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
4Ć30  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set controls:  
a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output through a 50ĂΩ  
coaxial cable, a 50 termination, and a dual banana connector to  
the DMM INPUT connector (see Figure 4Ć13).  
AWG2005  
AWG2005  
DMM  
8842A  
Figure 4Ć13:ăGain Accuracy Initial Test Hookup  
b. Set DMM controls:  
Mode  
Range  
Input  
VDC  
20  
Front  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select the AWG2005 waveform file:  
H
H
H
Push MODE! Autostep! Select Autostep Fil.  
Turn the general purpose knob to select the GAIN.AST file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Check gain accuracy:  
H
Check that the displayed step is Step 1 on the MODE menu. If it  
is not, select the side menu STOP button to return to Step 1.  
H
H
Note the DMM reading as "A" for this value.  
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the displayed step is Step 2.  
H
H
Note the DMM reading as "B" for this value.  
Do the following calculation.  
A - B  
H
Check that the calculated value is in the range from 0.990 V to  
1.010 V.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
H
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the displayed step is Step 3.  
H
H
Note the DMM reading as "C" for this value.  
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the displayed step is Step 4.  
H
H
Record the DMM reading as "D" for this value.  
Do the following calculation.  
C - D  
H
Check that the calculated value is in the range from 9.850 V to  
10.15 V.  
4. Move the connection for the coaxial cable from the AWG2005 CH1  
output to AWG2005 CH2 output connector.  
5. Repeat procedure 3.  
6. If Option 02 is installed (adds CH3 and CH4 output channels): Repeat  
above procedure for CH3 and CH4 outputs.  
7. End procedure: Retain the test hookup and control settings.  
This procedure checks the accuracy of the AWG2005 offset.  
Offset Accuracy  
Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Main Output, Offset, Accuracy, on  
pageĂ1Ć12.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable, a 50Ătermination, BNCĆtoĆ  
dual banana adapter, and a digital multimeter (DMM).  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set controls:  
a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output through a 50ĂΩ  
coaxial cable, a 50 termination, and a dual banana connector to  
the DMM INPUTconnector (see Figure 4Ć14).  
4Ć32  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
AWG2005  
AWG2005  
DMM  
8842A  
Figure 4Ć14:ăOffset Accuracy Initial Test Hookup  
b. Set DMM controls:  
Mode  
Range  
Input  
VDC  
20  
Front  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select the AWG2005 waveform file:  
H
H
H
Push MODE! Autostep! Select Autostep File.  
Turn the general purpose knob to select the OFF.AST file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Check offset accuracy:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
Check that the displayed step is Step 1 on the MODE menu. If it  
is not, select the side menu STOP button to return to Step 1.  
Check that the DMM voltage reading is in the range from 4.940Ă  
to 5.060ĂV.  
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the displayed step is Step 2.  
Check that the DMM voltage reading is in the range from  
-0.010Ă to 0.010ĂV.  
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that  
the displayed step is Step 3.  
Check that the DMM voltage reading is in the range from  
-5.060Ăto -4.940 V.  
4. Move the connection for the coaxial cable from the AWG2005 CH1  
output to AWG2005 CH2 output connector.  
5. Repeat procedure 3.  
6. If Option 02 is installed (adds CH3 and CH4 output channels): Repeat  
above procedure for CH3 and CH4 outputs.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
7. End procedure: Disconnect the DMM.  
This procedure checks the pulse response characteristics of the AWG2005  
output waveforms at amplitudes of 0.5 and 1ĂV.  
Pulse Response  
Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Main Output, Pulse Response, on  
pageĂ1Ć12.  
EquipmentRequired: A 50Ăcoaxial cable andan oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listedon page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output  
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input conĆ  
nector on the oscilloscope (see Figure 4Ć15).  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć15:ăPulse Response Initial Test Hookup  
b. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
Coupling  
Scale  
CH1  
DC  
0.1ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Input impedance  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
20Ăns/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
0ĂV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
4Ć34  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to select the PULSE.WFM file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
Select the PULSE.WFM filefor CH2 sameas CH1.  
3. Turnonthe AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that theLED  
abovetheCH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check pulse response at 0.5ĂV amplitude:  
a. Check rise time: Check that therisetimeof thewaveform displayed  
on theoscilloscopefrom the10% point to the90% point is 35Ăns or  
less.  
b. Check aberrations: Check that the aberrations of the displayed  
waveform is within 0.35Ădiv.  
c. Check flatness: Check that the flatness of the displayed waveform is  
within 0.15Ădiv. after 20Ăns from the rising edge.  
d. Change the oscilloscope controls:  
Trigger  
gative  
SlopeNe  
e. Check fall time: Check that thefall timeof thedisplayed waveform  
from the10% point to the90% point is 35Ăns or less.  
5. Check pulse response at 10ĂV amplitude:  
a. Change the oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1 scale2ĂV/div.  
CH1  
Trigger  
SlopePositive  
b. Change the AWG2005 controls:  
H
H
Push SETUP! Amplitude to changetheamplitudefor CH1.  
Press the numeric key 1, 0 and press the units key V to select  
an amplitudeof 10ĂV.  
c. Repeat substeps 4a through 4e, checking to the follow limits:  
Risetime  
35Ăns, maximum  
Aberrations  
0.35Ădiv., maximum  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Flatness  
Fall time  
0.15Ădiv., maximum  
35Ăns, maximum  
6. Move the connection for the coaxial cable from the AWG2005 CH1  
output to AWG2005 CH2 output connector.  
7. Turn on the AWG2005 CH2 output: Push the CH2 button so that the LED  
above the CH2 output connector is on.  
8. Repeat procedures 4 through 5.  
9. If Option 02 is installed (add CH3 and CH4 output channels: Repeat  
above procedure for the AWG2005 CH3 and CH4 output channels.  
10. End procedure: Remove the connections.  
This procedure checks the amplitude of the MARKER OUT signal.  
MARKER OUT  
Amplitude Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Output, MARKER, AmpliĆ  
tude, on pageĂ1Ć14.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookupand set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook upthe oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CH1  
MARKER OUT connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1  
vertical input connector on the oscilloscope (see Figure 4Ć16).  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć16:ăInitial Test Hookup  
b. Set oscilloscope controls:  
4Ć36  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Vertical  
CH1 Coupling  
CH1 Scale  
CH1  
DC  
500ĂmV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
CH1 Input Impedance  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
500ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MRK.WFM file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Check rearĆpanel CH1 MARKER OUT amplitude:  
a. Check CH1 MARKER OUT pulse amplitude:  
H
Check that the pulse amplitude of the displayed waveform is  
2ĂV or greater.  
pĆp  
4. Check rearĆpanel CH2 MARKER OUT pulse amplitude:  
a. Check CH2 MARKER OUT pulse amplitude:  
H
Move the coaxial cable from the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CH1  
MARKER OUT connector to the rearĆpanel CH2 MARKER OUT  
connector.  
H
Check that the pulse amplitude of the displayed waveform is 2ĂV  
or greater.  
5. Check Option 02: If the AWG2005 has CH3 and CH4, repeat this entire  
test, selecting the AWG2005 waveform and setting controls for CH3 and  
CH4 and checking:  
H
H
RearĆpanel CH3 MARKER pulse amplitude  
RearĆpanel CH4 MARKER pulse amplitude  
6. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
This procedure checks the amplitude of the CONTROL SIG OUT signal.  
CONTROL SIG OUT  
Amplitude Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Output, CONTROL SIG,  
Amplitude, on page 1Ć14Ă.  
Equipment Required: A 50Ăcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CONĆ  
TROL SIG OUT connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1  
vertical input connector on the oscilloscope (see Figure 4Ć17).  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć17:ăInitial Test Hookup  
b. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1  
DC  
CH1 Coupling  
CH1 Scale  
CH1 Input Impedance  
1ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50Ăns/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
500ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
2. Set the AWG2005 controls and select the waveform file:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
4Ć38  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
b. Selectwaveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! WaveformSequence , if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the CNTRL.WFM  
file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Check rearĆpanel CONTROL SIG OUT amplitude:  
a. Check CONTROL SIG OUT pulse amplitude:  
H
H
H
Push Mode! Gated.  
Push the AWG2005 MANUAL TRIGGER button.  
Check that the pulse upper level of the displayed waveform is  
2ĂV or greater.  
H
Check that the pulse lower level of the displayed waveform is  
0.8ĂV or less.  
4. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.  
This procedure checks the external trigger level accuracy of the AWG2005.  
External Trigger Level  
Accuracy Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Input, TRIGGER, Accuracy,  
on pageĂ1Ć15.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Insat ll et sthookup and setet stequipmentconrtols:  
a. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output through a  
coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input.  
b. Hook up function generator: Connect the AWG2005 TRIGGER INPUT  
through a coaxial cable to the function generator output (see FigĆ  
ure 4Ć18).  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Function Generator  
FG 5010  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć18:ăExternal Trigger Level Accuracy Initial Test Hookup  
c. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
CH1 Coupling  
CH1 Scale  
CH1  
DC  
0.2ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
CH1 Input Impedance  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
50õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
0ĂV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
d. Set function generator controls:  
Function  
Mode  
Square  
Continuous  
Parameter  
Frequency  
Amplitude  
Offset  
1ĂkHz  
0ĂV  
0.6ĂV  
Output  
Off  
2. Select the AWG2005 waveform file and set AWG2005 controls:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Modify AWG2005 default settings:  
H
Push MODE! Gated! Polarity to highlight Positive.  
4Ć40  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
H
Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose  
knob to select 1ĂV. (You can also use the numeric and units keys  
to select 1ĂV; then push ENTER.)  
c. Select waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the TRG_IN.WFM  
file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Turn on the AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED  
above the CH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check external trigger high level:  
a. Adjust oscilloscope controls: Press and hold the AWG2005 MANUĆ  
AL TRIGGER button and adjust the oscilloscope vertical and horiĆ  
zontal position to display the waveform from the AWG2005. Release  
the MANUAL TRIGGER button.  
b. Enable function generator output: Turn on the function generator  
output.  
c. Check external trigger level accuracy:  
H
H
Gradually increment the function generator offset level until a  
waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.  
Check that that the function generator offset level is from 0.85 to  
1.15ĂV when the waveform is first displayed.  
5. Check external trigger low level:  
a. Change the function generator controls:  
Parameter  
Offset  
-0.6ĂV  
b. Change the AWG2005 controls:  
H
H
Push MODE! Polarity to highlight Negative.  
Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose  
knob to select -1ĂV. (You can also use the numeric and units  
keys to select -1ĂV; then push ENTER.)  
c. Check external trigger level accuracy:  
H
H
Gradually decrease the function generator offset level until a  
waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.  
Check that that the function generator offset level is from  
-1.15ĂV to -0.85ĂV when the waveform is first displayed.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
6. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output and disconnect  
the function generator.  
This procedure checks the AWG2005 response to an external CLOCK IN  
signal.  
External CLOCK IN  
Check  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Input, CLOCK, Threshold  
level, on pageĂ1Ć15.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2005 CH1 output through a  
coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input.  
b. Hook up function generator: Connect the AWG2005 rearĆpanel  
CLOCK IN through a coaxial cable to the function generator output  
(see Figure 4Ć19).  
Function Generator  
FG 5010  
AWG2005  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć19:ăExternal CLOCK IN Initial Test Hookup  
c. Set oscilloscope controls:  
4Ć42  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Vertical  
Coupling  
Scale  
CH1  
DC  
0.2ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Input Impedance  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
500õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
0ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
d. Set function generator controls:  
Function  
Mode  
Square  
Continuous  
Parameter  
Frequency  
Amplitude  
Offset  
1ĂMHz  
2.0ĂV  
1.0ĂV  
Output  
Off  
2. Select the AWG2005 waveform file and set AWG2005 controls:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) andthe CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the EXT_CLK.WFM  
file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
3. Turn on the AWG2005 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED  
above the CH1 output connector is on.  
4. Check the external CLOCK IN threshold level:  
a. Enable function generator output: Turn on function generator output.  
b. Check the level: Check that the waveform displayed on the oscilloĆ  
scope has an amplitude of 5 divisions and a stable display of 5  
cycles.  
5. Turn off equipment output and disconnect test hookup:  
a. Disable function generator output: Turn off function generator output.  
b. Remove connections: Disconnect all connections to the AWG2005.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
This procedure checks operation ofthe AWG2005 slave mode.  
Optional Check-  
MasterĆSlave  
NOTE  
Operation Check  
This Slave Operation check has been factory verified. The check is  
performed only as necessary or only after a failure.  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Input, CONTROL SIG IN,  
Threshold level, Pulse Width, Input Volts, on pageĂ1Ć15.  
Equipment Required: Two 50Ăcoaxial cables, a function generator, and  
an oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Insat ll et sthookup and setet stequipmentconrtols:  
a. Hook up master AWG2005: Connect the slave AWG2005 (device  
under test) rearĆpanel CONTROL SIG IN and CLOCK IN connectors  
to the master AWG2005 CONTROL SIG OUT and CLOCK OUT  
connectors using the two coaxial cables.  
b. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the master AWG2005 CH1 output  
and slave AWG2005 CH1 output to the oscilloscope CH1 and CH2  
vertical inputs using the two coaxial cables (see Figure 4Ć20).  
CLOCK  
OUT  
CONTROL  
CLOCK  
IN  
SIG IN  
CONTROL  
SIG OUT  
Oscilloscope  
AWG2005  
AWG2005  
CH1  
CH1  
CH1  
CH2  
Slave AWG2005 (DUT)  
Master AWG2005  
Figure 4Ć20:ăSlave Operation Initial Test Hookup  
c. Setoscilloscope conrtols:  
4Ć44  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Vertical  
Coupling  
Scale  
CH1 and CH2  
DC  
0.2ĂV/div.  
50ĂΩ  
Input Impedance  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
500õs/div.  
Trigger  
Source  
Coupling  
Slope  
CH1  
DC  
Positive  
0ĂmV  
Auto  
Level  
Mode  
Output  
Off  
2. Select the master AWG2005 waveform file and set master AWG2005  
controls:  
a. Initialize master AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! ConĆ  
fig...! Reset to Factory! O.K.  
b. Load waveform file: Load the CNTRL_IN.WFM file only to the master  
AWG2005 using the performance check disk. For details on how to  
load a file, see the Instruction for Operation in the section 2.  
c. Set waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, ifnecessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list ofwaveform  
files and highlight the SLAVE.WFM file.  
H
H
H
Push ENTER to select the file.  
Push MODE! Triggered.  
Press the bottom Configure button to select Master.  
3. Select the slave AWG2005 waveform file and set slave AWG2005 conĆ  
trols:  
a. Initialize slave AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! ConĆ  
fig...! Reset to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, ifnecessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the SLAVE.WFM file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
Push MODE! Cont.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
H Press the bottom Configure button to select Slave.  
4. Turn on CH1 output on both AWG2005 instruments : Push the CH1  
button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on.  
5. Check the slave operation:  
a. Change the master AWG2005 operation mode from Triggered to  
Cont.  
b. Check the operation: Check that the two waveforms displayed on  
the oscilloscope have a same timing relation and a stable display.  
6. Disconnect test hookup:  
a. Remove connections: Disconnect all connections to the both  
AWG2005 instruments and oscilloscope.  
This procedure checks the AWG2005 DIGITAL DATA OUT at the rear panel.  
DIGITAL DATA OUT  
Check (Option 04)  
NOTE  
This check requires that the AWG2005 has Option 04 installed.  
Electrical Characteristic Checked: Auxiliary Output, DIGITAL DATA  
OUT, Level, on pageĂ1Ć14.  
Equipment Required: Digital data out cable, 2 X13 header, probe and  
oscilloscope.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:  
a. Hook up termination board: Connect a digital data output cable to  
the AWG2005 rearĆpanel CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT output (see  
Figure 4Ć21).  
b. Hook up oscilloscope:  
H
H
Connect the oscilloscope probe to the CH1 vertical input.  
Connect the probe groundĆclip to the GND pin of 2 X13 header.  
4Ć46  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
AWG 2005 Rear Panel  
Oscilloscope  
213 Header  
Digital Data  
Out Cable  
Figure4Ć21:ăDigital Data Out Initial Test Hookup  
c. Set oscilloscope controls:  
Vertical  
Scale  
Input Impedance  
CH1  
1ĂV/div.  
1ĂMΩ  
Horizontal  
Sweep  
Adjust as needed  
Trigger  
Mode  
Auto  
2. Create the AWG2005 waveform file, select waveform file, and set  
AWG2005 controls:  
a. Initialize AWG2005 controls: Push UTILITY! Misc! Config...! ReĆ  
set to Factory! O.K.  
b. Select waveform file:  
H
Push SETUP! Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a  
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the  
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).  
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the DIGI_OUT.WFM  
file.  
Push ENTER to select the file.  
c. Set AWG2005 controls:  
H Push MODE! Cont  
3. Check the CH1 digital data output signals:  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
a. Check the signal levels:  
H
Contact the oscilloscope probe to the pins on 2 X13 header (see  
Figure 4Ć22). Check that the oscilloscope display shows these  
signals:  
H
H
Data signals D0ĆD11 and CLK (Clock) are TTL level output.  
All other pins are ground.  
2X13 Header  
CLK  
D11  
GND  
D1  
D0  
GND  
Digital Data Out Cable  
Figure 4Ć22:ăOutput Pins on the Digital Data Out Cable  
4. Check the CH2 digital data output signals:  
a. Change connection: Change the connection for the digital data out  
cable from CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT connector to CH2 DIGITAL  
DATA OUT connector.  
b. Repeat the step 2 and 3 to check the CH2 digital data output sigĆ  
nals.  
5. Turn off equipment output and disconnect test hookup:  
a. Disable power supply output: Turn off power supply output.  
b. Remove connections: Disconnect all connections to the AWG2005.  
4Ć48  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
This procedure checks the AWG2005 floating point processor.  
Floating Point  
Processor Check  
(Option 09)  
NOTE  
Thischeck requiresthat the AWG2005 hasOption 09 installed.  
Equipment Required: None.  
Prerequisites: The AWG2005 meets the prerequisites listed on page 4Ć7.  
Procedure:  
1. Check that floating point processor test in internal diagnostics passes:  
a. Run the AWG2005 internal diagnostics: Push the AWG2005 ON/  
STBY switch two times so that the AWG2005 runs the powerĆon  
diagnostics.  
b. Check the FPP test results: When the AWG2005 finishes the FPP  
test, check that the test result is Pass.  
This completes the performance tests for the AWG2005.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
4Ć49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
4Ć50  
Performance Verification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustments  
The AWG2005 doesn't need manual adjustment since it is equipped with a  
self calibration system.. This internal calibration enables the instrument to  
automatically adjust the gain and offset of the pre-amp, the gain error of  
filter, the attenuation rate of attenuator, as well as several other parameters.  
Perform the internal calibration to return the AWG2005 to conformance with  
performance specified in section 1, Specifications. As for the internal calibraĆ  
tion, see the subsection, Self Tests, in section 4.  
Adjustment Interval Ċ Generally, this internal calibration should be done  
every 12 months.  
Adjustment After Repair Ċ Perform the internal calibration after the  
removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
5Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Adjustments  
5Ć2  
Adjustment Procedures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Maintenance  
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective  
maintenance on the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. Specifically,  
the following subsections are included:  
H
H
H
H
H
Before Maintenance Ċ This subsecton includes general information on  
preventing damage to internal modules when doing maintenance.  
Inspection and Cleaning Ċ Information and procedures for inspecting  
the AWG2005 and cleaning its external and internal modules.  
Removal and Installation Procedures Ċ How to remove defective modĆ  
ules and replace new or repaired modules.  
Repackaging Ċ Information on packaging the AWG2005 properly for  
shipment.  
Troubleshooting Ċ Information on isolating failed modules. Included are  
instructions on operating the AWG2005 internal diagnostic routines and  
troubleshooting flowcharts for fault isolation. Most of the flowcharts use  
the internal diagnostic routines to speed fault isolation to a specific  
module.  
Before performing any of the procedures in the Maintenance section, note  
the following:  
Prerequisites  
H
H
H
H
Only trained service technicians should perform these procedures.  
Read the Safety Summary located near the beginning of this manual.  
Read the Strategy for Servicing in the frontmatter introduction.  
Read section 2, Operating Information.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Maintenance  
Preventing ESD  
CAUTION  
Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in the  
AWG2005.  
Precautions  
When performing service which requires internal access to the AWG2005,  
follow these precautions to avoid damaging internal modules and their  
components due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).  
1. Minimize handling of staticĆsensitive modules.  
2. Transport andstore staticĆsensitive modules in their staticĆprotected  
containers or on a metal rail. Label any package that contains staticĆsenĆ  
sitive modules.  
3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded  
antistatic wrist strap while handling these modules. Only service staticĆ  
sensitive modules at a staticĆfree work station.  
4. Do not remove the AWG2005 cabinet unless you have met precaution  
number 3, above. Consider all internal modules staticĆsensitive.  
5. Do not allow anything capable of generating or holding a static charge  
on the work station surface.  
6. Handle circuit boards by the edges when possible.  
7. Do not slide the modules over any surface.  
8. Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or workĆsurface coverĆ  
ing capable of generating a static charge.  
9. Do not use highĆvelocity compressedair when cleaning dust from  
modules.  
Susceptibility to ESD  
Table 6Ć1 lists the relative susceptibility of various classes of semiconducĆ  
tors. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in unprotectedenvironĆ  
ments.  
6Ć2  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Maintenance  
TableĂ6Ć1:ăRelative Susceptibility to StaticĆdischarge Damage  
Semiconductor Classes  
Relative  
Susceptibility  
1
Levels  
MOS or CMOS microcircuits or discrete circuits, or linear  
microcircuits with MOS inputs (most sensitive)  
1
ECL  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Schottky signal diodes  
Schottky TTL  
HighĆfrequency bipolar transistors  
JFET  
Linear microcircuits  
LowĆpower Schottky TTL  
TTL (least sensitive)  
1
Voltage equivalent for levels (voltage discharged from a 100 pF capacitor through  
resistance of 100 ):  
1 = 100 to 500 V  
2 = 200 to 500 V  
3 = 250 V  
6 = 600 to 800 V  
7 = 400 to 1000 V (est.)  
8 = 900 V  
4 = 500 V  
5 = 400 to 600 V  
9 = 1200 V  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Maintenance  
6Ć4  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspection and Cleaning  
This subsection describes how to determine whether the AWG2005 needs  
cleaning, and how to do the cleaning. Inspection and cleaning are prevenĆ  
tive maintenance procedures. When done regularly, preventive maintenance  
may prevent AWG2005 malfunction and enhance reliability.  
Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the  
AWG2005 and using general care when operating it.  
How often to do maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in  
which the AWG2005 operates.  
The cabinet helps keep dust out of the AWG2005 and is a major component  
of the instrument cooling system. The cabinet should normally be in place  
when operating the AWG2005. The AWG2005 front cover (optional accessoĆ  
ry) protects the front panel and display from dust and damage. Install it  
when storing or transporting the instrument.  
General Care  
Inspect and clean the AWG2005 as operating conditions require. The collecĆ  
tion of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat and break  
down. (Dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipaĆ  
tion.) Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that can cause an  
instrument failure, especially under highĆhumidity conditions.  
Inspection and  
Cleaning Procedures  
WARNING  
To avoid personal injury or death due to electric shock, unplug the  
power cord from the line voltage source before cleaning the  
AWG2005.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspection and Cleaning  
CAUTION  
To prevent damaging the plastics used in the AWG2005 do not use  
chemical cleaning agents. Use only deionized water when cleaning  
the menu buttons or frontĆpanel buttons. Use a ethyl alcohol soluĆ  
tion asa cleaner, and rinse with deionized water.  
To prevent damaging AWG2005 components, do not use highĆpresĆ  
sure compressed air when cleaning dust from the interior of the  
AWG2005. (High pressure air can cause electrostatic discharge.)  
Instead, use low pressure compressed air (about 9 psi).  
Inspection Ċ Exterior  
Inspect the outside of the AWG2005 for damage, wear, and missing parts,  
using Table 6Ć2 as a guide. If the AWG2005 appears to have been dropped  
or otherwise abused, check it thoroughly to verify correct operationand  
performance. Repair any defects that may cause personal injury or lead to  
further damage to the AWG2005.  
TableĂ6Ć2:ăExternal Inspection Check List  
Item  
Inspect For  
Repair Action  
Cabinet, front panel, and  
cover  
Cracks, scratches, deformations, damĆ  
aged hardware or gaskets.  
Replace defective module.  
FrontĆpanel knobs  
Missing, damaged, or loose knobs.  
Repair or replace missing or defective  
knobs.  
Connectors  
Broken shells, cracked insulation, and  
deformed contacts. Dirt in connectors.  
Replace defective modules. Clear or  
wash out dirt.  
Carrying handle, cabinet, Correct operation.  
feet  
Replace defective module.  
Accessories  
Missing items or parts of items, bent  
pins, broken or frayed cables, and  
damaged connectors.  
Replace damaged or missing items,  
frayed cables, and defective modules.  
6Ć6  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspection and Cleaning  
Cleaning Procedure Ċ Exterior  
WARNING  
To avoid potential electric shock hazard or damage to the  
AWG2005 circuits, do not allow any moisture inside the AWG2005  
during external cleaning; use only enough liquid to dampen the  
cloth or applicator.  
1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the AWG2005 with a lint free cloth.  
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general  
purpose detergentĆandĆwater solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.  
3. Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lintĆfree cloth  
dampened with either ethyl alcohol or, preferably, a gentle generalĆpurĆ  
pose detergentĆandĆwater solution.  
Inspection Ċ Interior  
To access the inside of the AWG2005 for inspection and cleaning, refer to  
the Removal and Installation Procedures in this section.  
Inspect the internalportions of the AWG2005 for damage and wear, using  
Table 6Ć3 as a guide. Repair any defects immediately.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that circuit  
boardsand componentsare dry before applying power to the  
AWG2005.  
TableĂ6Ć3:ăInternal Inspection Check List  
Item  
Inspect For  
Repair Action  
Circuit boards  
Loose, broken or corroded solder conĆ  
nections. Burned circuit boards.  
Burned, broken, or cracked circuitĆrun  
plating.  
Remove failed modules and replace  
with a new module.  
Resistors  
Burned, cracked, broken blistered  
condition.  
Replace failed module and replace with  
a new module.  
Solder connections  
Cold solder or rosin joints.  
Resolder joint and clean with ethyl alcoĆ  
hol.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inspection and Cleaning  
Resolder joint and clean with ethyl alcohol.  
TableĂ6Ć3:ăInternal Inspection Check List (Cont.)  
Inspect For Repair Action  
Item  
Capacitors  
Damaged or leaking cases. Corroded  
solder on leads or terminals.  
Remove damaged module and replace  
with a new module from the factory.  
Semiconductors  
Loosely inserted in sockets. Distorted  
pins.  
Firmly seat loose semiconductors. ReĆ  
move devices that have distorted pins.  
Carefully straighten pins (as required to  
fit the socket), using longĆnose pliers,  
and reinsert firmly. Ensure that straightĆ  
ening action does not crack pins, causĆ  
ing them to break off.  
Wiring and cables  
Chassis  
Loose plugs or connectors. Burned,  
broken, or frayed wiring.  
Firmly seat connectors. Repair or reĆ  
place modules with defective wires or  
cables.  
Dents, deformations, and damaged  
hardware.  
Straighten, repair, or replace defective  
hardware.  
Cleaning Procedure Ċ Interior  
If, after doing steps 1 and 2, a module is clean upon inspection, skip the  
remaining steps.  
1. Blow off dust with dry, lowĆpressure, deionized air (approximately 9 psi).  
2. Remove any remaining dust with a lintĆfree cloth dampened in ethyl  
alcohol, and rinse with a warm deionized water. (A cottonĆtipped appliĆ  
cator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards.)  
3. If steps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt, the AWG2005 may be  
spray washed using a solution of ethyl alcohol by doing step 4 through  
8.  
4. Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible  
shields and panels (see Removal and Installation Procedures in this  
section).  
5. Spray wash dirty parts with the ethyl alcohol, and wait 60 seconds for  
the majority of the alcohol to evaporate.  
6. Use hot (120_ F to 140_ F) deionized water to thoroughly rinse them.  
7. Dry all parts with lowĆpressure, deionized air.  
8. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment  
using lowĆtemperature (125_ F to 150_ F) circulating air.  
Lubrication  
There is no periodiclubrication required for the AWG2005.  
6Ć8  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
This subsection describes removing and installing the mechanical and  
electrical modules in the AWG2005.  
This subsection contains the following:  
Preparation  
H
H
H
H
Preparatory information  
A list of equipment required in removing modules  
Module locator diagrams for finding each module in the AWG2005  
Procedures for removing and reinstalling electrical and mechanical  
modules  
WARNING  
To avoid possible personal injury or damage to AWG2005 compoĆ  
nents, read the Preparation for Use subsection in section 2, and  
Preventing ESD in the subsection, Before Maintenance. Read the  
Safety Summary found near the beginning of this manual before  
doing any procedure in this manual.  
To avoid possible personal injury or death, disconnect the power  
cord from the line voltage source before doing any procedures in  
this section.  
List of Mechanical Parts  
Section 10, Mechanical Parts List, lists all mechanical parts in the AWG2005.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
General Instructions  
NOTE  
Read these general instructions before removing a module.  
First read the Summary of Procedures to understand how the procedures  
are organized. Then read Equipment Required to find out the tools needed  
to remove and install modules.  
To remove a module, begin by doing the Access Procedure (on page 6Ć13).  
By following the instructions in that procedure, you can remove the desired  
module without unnecessarily removing other modules.  
Summary of Procedures  
The Access Procedure on page 6Ć13 identifies the procedure for removing  
each module. These categories separate the procedures based on their  
location in the AWG2005.  
H
Procedures for External Modules on page 6Ć16 describes how to remove  
modules without internal access to the AWG2005.  
H
Procedures for Internal Modules on page 6Ć28 describes how to remove  
modules which require internal access to the AWG2005.  
Equipment Required  
The removal of most modules in the AWG2005 requires only a screwdriver  
handle mounted with a size TĆ15, Torx screwdriver tip. Use this tool whenĆ  
ever a procedure step instructs you to remove or install a screw, unless a  
different size screwdriver is specified in that step. The first step of a module  
procedure lists all equipment required to remove and reinstall the module.  
6Ć10  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
TableĂ6Ć4:ăEquipment Required  
Name  
Description  
Part Number  
003Ć0524Ć00  
003Ć0965Ć00  
003Ć0815Ć00  
003Ć0966Ć00  
Screwdriver handle  
TĆ9 Torx tip  
Accepts TorxĆdriver bits  
TorxĆdriver bit for TĆ9 size screw heads  
TorxĆdriver bit for TĆ10 size screw heads  
TorxĆdriver bit for TĆ15 size screw heads  
TĆ10 Torx tip  
TĆ15 Torx tip  
#1 Phillips tip  
FlatĆbladed screwdriver  
PhillipsĆdriver bit for #1 size screw heads  
003Ć0335Ć00  
Screwdriver for removing standardĆheaded  
screws  
Hex wrench, 0.050 inch  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
Standard tool  
1
Hex wrench,  
@
16  
inch  
NeedleĆnose pliers  
1
Nut driver,  
@
inch  
2
@
1
Nut driver, inch  
4
5
Nut driver,  
@
16  
inch  
Nut driver, 5 mm  
OpenĆend wrench  
Soldering iron  
1
@
inch  
2
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
AWG2005 Orientation  
In this manual, procedures refer to front," back," top," etc. of the  
AWG2005. Figure 6Ć1 shows how the sides are referenced.  
F
ns  
5
1
2
B
Figure 6Ć1:ăAWG2005 Orientation  
6Ć12  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
When you have identified the module to be removed for service, read GenerĆ  
al Instructions found earlier in this section. Then use the flowchart in FigĆ  
ure 6Ć2 to determine which procedures to use for removing the module. The  
removal procedures end with reinstallation instructions.  
Access Procedure  
Locate the module to  
be removed in  
FigureĂ6Ć3 or 6Ć4.  
To remove:  
FrontĆpanel Knob  
Go to page:  
6Ć17  
6Ć18  
Is the  
module in  
Figure 6Ć3?  
Yes  
Line Fuse and Line Cord  
Rear Cover and Cabinet  
EMI Gaskets  
6Ć20  
6Ć22  
Front Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons  
FrontĆpanel Module  
6Ć22  
6Ć24  
No  
Make sure a floppy  
disk is not in the  
floppyĆdisk drive.  
To remove: Go to page:  
A23 Analog board or A3 Analog board (Option 02) 6Ć29  
Do the procedure, Rear  
Cover and Cabinet on  
page 6Ć20, removing the  
rear cover and cabinet.  
Connector Module  
6Ć31  
6Ć33  
6Ć35  
6Ć37  
6Ć38  
6Ć39  
6Ć42  
6Ć45  
6Ć45  
6Ć45  
6Ć45  
6Ć45  
6Ć49  
6Ć51  
6Ć53  
Fan and Fan Frame  
Rear Shield Cover  
Rear BNC Connectors  
Power Supply Module  
AUX Power Board and AC Inlet  
Monitor Module and CRT Frame  
A6 CPU, A2 AWG, A11 D/A and A1 Clock board  
A2 AWG and A11 D/A board (Option 02)  
A25 Digital Data Out board (Option 04)  
A31 Clock Sweep board (Option 05)  
A7 Floating Point Processor board (Option 09)  
A5 Backplane board  
Lithium battery  
FloppyĆdisk Drive Module  
Figure 6Ć2:ăGuide to Removal Procedures  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Fuse Cap  
Line Fuse  
RearCover  
Line Cord  
Cabinet  
CRT Filter  
FrontĆpanel  
Module  
Menu Buttons  
FloppyĆdisk Drive Bezel  
FrontĆpanel Knob  
EMI Gasket  
Trim Ring  
Front Cover (Optional)  
Figure 6Ć3:ăExternal Modules  
6Ć14  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Rear Panel  
A25 Digital Data Out Board  
(Option 04) or  
A7 Floating Point Processor Board  
(Option 09)  
A6 CPU Board  
A2 AWG Board  
A11 D/A Board  
(Option 02,CH3&CH4)  
Fan  
Power Supply Module  
Fan Frame  
Rear Panel  
A2 AWG Board  
A11 D/A Board  
(CH1&CH2)  
AUX Power  
Monitor Module  
AC Inlet  
A1 Clock Board  
or A31 Clock Sweep Board  
(Option 05)  
Rear BNC  
Connector  
CRT Frame  
Rear Shield  
Cover  
Floppy Disk  
Drive Cover  
Floppy Disk  
Bracket  
Front Panel  
Floppy Disk Drive  
Board  
Support  
Board Support  
Connector Module  
A5 Backplane Board  
A23 Analog Board (2CH)  
or A3 Analog Board  
(Option 02,4CH)  
Figure 6Ć4:ăInternal Modules  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Do the Access Procedure (page 6Ć13) before doing any procedure in this  
group.  
Procedures for  
External Modules  
This group contains the following procedures:  
H
FrontĆpanelKnob  
H
H
H
H
H
Line Fuse and Line Cord  
Rear Cover and Cabinet  
EMI Gaskets  
Front Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons  
FrontĆpanelModuel  
6Ć16  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
FrontĆpanel Knob  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: You will need a  
1
@
16Ć  
the front panelin the ol cator diagram, External Modules, Figure 6Ć3.  
inch hex wrench to do this procedure. Find the frontĆpanelknob on  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the front facing you (see Figure 6Ć5).  
3. Remove front cover: If the optional front cover is installed, grasp the front  
cover by the left and right edges and snap it off of the trim ring. (When  
reinstalling, align and snap back on.)  
1
4. Remove knob: Loosen the setscrew securing the knob using the  
hex wrench. Pull the knob toward you to remove it.  
@ Ćinch  
16  
5. Reinstallation: Place the knob onto the shaft, and tighten the setscrew  
1
using the  
@ Ćinch hex wrench.  
16  
Release  
1
Hex Wrench,  
@
16 inch  
FrontĆpanel Knob  
Figure 6Ć5:ăFrontĆpanel Knob Removal  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Line Fuse and Line Cord  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: You will need a  
flatĆbladed screwdriver to do this procedure. Locate the line fuse and  
line cord in the locator diagram, External Modules, Figure 6Ć3.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the back facingyou. If you are servicingthe line fuse, do the  
next step; if you are servicingthe line cord, skip to step 4.  
3. Remove line fuse: Find the fuse cap on the rear panel. See Figure 6Ć6.  
Remove the fuse cap by turningit counterĆclockwise usinga flatĆbladed  
screwdriver, and remove the line fuse. Reverse the procedure to reinĆ  
stall.  
4. Remove line cord: Find the line cord on the rear cover. See Figure 6Ć6.  
Remove the lineĆcord retaining clamp by first unplugging the line cord  
from the line cord receptacle (1). Grasp both the line cord and the  
retainingclamp and rotate it 90 degrees counterĆclockwise (2). Pull the  
line cord and clamp away to complete the removal (3). Reverse the  
procedure to reinstall.  
5. Reinstallation: Do steps 3 and 4 in reverse order to reinstall the line cord,  
and then the line fuse.  
6Ć18  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
(2) Rotate  
(1) Unplug  
(3) Pull  
Line Fuse  
Fuse Cap  
Figure 6Ć6:ăLine Fuse and Line Cord Removal  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Rear Cover and Cabinet  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
a. You will need a screwdriver with size TĆ9 and TĆ15 Torx tips to do this  
procedure.  
b. Make sure the AWG2005 front cover (optional accessory) is  
installed. If it is not, install it by snapping the edges of the front cover  
over the trim ring.  
c. Locate the rear cover and cabinet in the locator diagram, External  
Modules, Figure 6Ć3.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 face down, with the front cover on  
the work surface and the instrument bottom facing you (see FigureĂ6Ć7).  
3. Disconnect line cord: Do the Line Fuse and Line Cord procedure on  
page 6Ć18, removing only the line cord.  
4. Remove rear cover: Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove  
the four screws securing the rear cover to the instrument. Lift off the rear  
cover.  
5. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 face down, with the front cover on  
the work surface and right side facing you.  
6. Remove floppy disk drive bezel: Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ9 Torx  
tip, remove the four screws securing the floppyĆdisk drive bezel to the  
cabinet. Lift off the floppyĆdisk drive bezel.  
7. Remove cabinet:  
CAUTION  
To prevent damaging the eject button, make sure floppy disk is not  
inserted in the floppy disk drive before removing the cabinet from  
the AWG2005.  
a. Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the screw  
securing the left side of the cabinet to the instrument.  
b. Grasp the right and left edges of the cabinet toward the back.  
c. Pull upward to slide the cabinet off the instrument. Take care not to  
bind or snag the cabinet on internal cabling as you remove it.  
8. Reinstall cabinet and rear cover:  
a. Do steps 3 through 7 in reverse order to reinstall the cabinet.  
b. Take care not to bind or snag the cabinet on internal cabling; reĆ  
dress cables as necessary.  
6Ć20  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
c. When sliding the cabinet, be sure that the front edge of the cabinet  
aligns with the groove containing the four EMI shields on the trim  
ring.  
d. When reinstalling the four screws at the rear panel, tighten themto a  
torque of 16 kg/cm(6Ăin/lbs).  
e. See the procedure, Line Fuse and Line Cord, on page 6Ć18 to reinĆ  
stall the line cord. This completes the AWG2005 reassembly.  
Screws (TĆ15)  
Rear Cover  
Screws (TĆ15)  
Cabinet  
Screw (TĆ15)  
Screws (TĆ9)  
Figure 6Ć7:ăRear Cover and Cabinet Removal  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
EMI Gaskets  
1. Remove front cover and trim ring: Do the Front Cover, Trim Ring, and  
Menu Buttons procedure on page 6Ć22, removing only the front cover  
andtrim ring.  
CAUTION  
When reinstalling the EMI gaskets and/or the AWG2005 cabinet  
carefully follow the instructions given to prevent exceeding the  
environmentalcharacteristics for EMI.  
2. Remove EMI gaskets:  
a. You will need needleĆnose pliers to do this part of the procedure.  
b. Locate the EMI gaskets in the locator diagram, ExternalModuel s , in  
Figure 6Ć3.  
c. Use a pair of needleĆnose pliers to remove the four sections of EMI  
gaskets from the groove in the trim ring.  
3. Reinstall EMI gaskets: Press the EMI gaskets back into the groove in the  
trim ring.  
Front Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: No tools are  
needed. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram,  
ExternalModuel s , in Figure 6Ć3.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the back down on the work  
surface andbottom facing you (see Figure 6Ć8).  
3. Remove front cover: If the optional front cover is installed, grasp the front  
cover by the left andright edges andsnap it off of the trim ring. (When  
reinstalling, align andsnap back on.)  
4. Remove frontĆpanelknob: Do the FrontĆpanelKnob procedure, on  
pageĂ6Ć17.  
6Ć22  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Trim Ring : when removing the  
trim ring, graspits back edge and  
vigorously flex it upward before  
pulling it forward.  
Trim Ring  
Menu Buttons  
Figure 6Ć8:ăFront Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Button Removal  
(Front Cover not Shown)  
CAUTION  
To prevent contaminating AWG2005 parts, do not touch the carbon  
contact points on the menu buttons installed in the trim ring. Also,  
do not touch the contacts on the flex circuit exposed when you  
remove the trim ring.  
5. Remove trim ring: Grasp the trim ring by the top edge and pry it up and  
lift it forward to snap it off of the trim ring. If servicing the menubuttons,  
lift them out of the trim ring. (When reinstalling, reinsert the menu butĆ  
tons, align the trim ring to the chassis and press it back on.)  
6. Reinstallation: Do steps 3-5 in reverse order to reinstall the menu  
buttons, trim ring and the front cover, following the reinstallation instrucĆ  
tions found in each step.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
FrontĆpanel Module  
NOTE  
This procedure includes removal and reinstallation instructions for  
the frontĆpanel module and frontĆpanel buttons. Unless either of  
those modules are being serviced, do not do step6, Further  
disassembly of FrontĆpanel Module."  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
1
a. You will need a flatĆbladed screwdriver and a 0.05Ćinch and  
hex wrench to do this procedure.  
@ Ćinch  
16  
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, External  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć3.  
c. Do the procedure, Front Cover, Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons,  
stepsĂ1-6 (immediately preceding this procedure).  
2. Remove frontĆpanel knob: Do the FrontĆpanel Knob procedure, on  
pageĂ6Ć17.  
3. Remove front cover, trim ring, and menu buttons: Do the Front Cover,  
Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons procedure on page 6Ć22 removing only the  
module(s) you want to service.  
4. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the front facing you.  
5. Remove frontĆpanel module:  
a. As shown in Figure 6Ć9, release the snap at the right of the frontĆ  
panel module using a flatĆbladed screwdriver. Lift the frontĆpanel  
module out of the chassis until you can reach the interconnect  
cable.  
b. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cable at J101 and flexible board  
connector at JP301 on the A12 Keyboard assembly. Disconnect the  
interconnect cable at the TRIGGER INPUT connector.  
c. Finally, lift the frontĆpanel module out of the chassis to complete the  
removal.  
6Ć24  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
To JP301  
To J101  
(2)Pull  
(1)Push  
Flat-bladed  
Screwdriver  
To TRIGGER  
INPUT Connector  
Front-panel  
Module  
Figure 6Ć9:ăFrontĆpanel Module Removal  
6. Further disassembly of frontĆpanel module: If the frontĆpanel module or  
the frontĆpanel buttons are to be serviced, do the following substeps:  
a. Remove the frontĆpanel knob from the frontĆpanel module using the  
method described in the procedure, FrontĆpanel Knob, on page  
6Ć17.  
b. Remove the setscrew completely from the extension using the  
0.05Ćinch hex wrench, and then remove the extension from the shaft  
of the rotary switch.  
c. As shown in Figure 6Ć10, release the four hooks, and then remove  
the A12 Keyboard from the chassis.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Hooks  
A12 Keyboard  
Hooks  
Figure 6Ć10:ăA12 Keyboard Removal  
d. Now hand disassemble the frontĆpanel module components using  
Figure 6Ć11 as a guide. Reverse the procedure to reassemble.  
6Ć26  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Extension  
Setscrew  
A12 Keyboard  
Figure 6Ć11:ăDisassembly of FrontĆpanel Module  
7. Reinstallation: If the frontĆpanel module was further disassembled in  
step 6, then reverse substeps 6a-6d to reassemble, using Figure 6Ć11  
as a guide. Then do the substeps in step 3 in reverse order, reversing  
the order of the items in each substep. Last, reinstall the trim ring and, if  
desired, the front cover, referring to the procedure, Front Cover, Trim  
Ring, and Menu Buttons (page 6Ć22).  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Do the Access Procedure (on page 6Ć13) before doing any procedure in this  
group.  
Procedures for  
Internal Modules  
This part contains the following removal and installation procedures; the  
procedures are presented in the order listed:  
H
A23 Analog Board or A3 Analog Board (Option 02)  
Connector Module  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Fan and Fan Frame  
Rear Shield Cover  
Rear BNC Connector  
Power Supply Module  
AUX Power Board and AC Inlet  
Monitor Module and CRT Frame  
Circuit Boards:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A6 CPUBoard  
A2 AWG Board  
A11 D/A Board  
A1 Clock Board  
For Option 02: A2 AWG Board and A11 D/A Board  
For Option 04: A25 Digital Data Out Board  
For Option 05: A31 Clock Sweep Board  
For Option 09: A7 Floating Point Processor Board  
H
H
H
A5 Backplane Board  
Lithium Battery  
Floppy Disk Drive Module  
6Ć28  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
A23 Analog Board or A3 Analog Board (Option 02)  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
a. You will need a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip to do this proceĆ  
dure.  
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the top down on the work  
surface and the right side facing you.  
3. Remove A23 Analog board:  
a. Disconnect the six interconnect cables at J100, J198, J200, J298,  
J500 and J550 on the A23 Analogboard. See Figure 6Ć12.  
b. Usinga screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the eight  
screws attachingthe A23 Analogboard to the chassis.  
c. Lift the A23 Analogboard up and away from the chassis to complete  
the removal.  
J800 on the A23 Analogboard is connected to J7 on the A5 BackĆ  
plane board. Grasp the both ends of the A23 Analogboard and pull  
upward slowly to remove it.  
4. Remove A3 Analog board (Option 02):  
a. Disconnect the ten interconnect cables at J100, J198, J200, J298,  
J300, J398, J400, J498, J500 and J550 on the A3 Analogboard. See  
Figure 6Ć12.  
b. Usinga screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the eight  
screws attachingthe A3 Analogboard to the chassis.  
c. Lift the A3 Analogboard up and away from the chassis to complete  
the removal.  
J800 on the A3 Analogboard is connected to J7 on the A5 BackĆ  
plane board. Grasp the both ends of the A3 Analogboard and pull  
upward slowly to remove it.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Screws  
(T-15)  
J100  
J198  
J500  
Screws  
(T-15)  
J200  
J300  
J298  
J398  
J550  
J400  
J498  
Figure 6Ć12:ăA23/A3 Analog Board Removal  
5. Reinstallation: If the AWG2005 includes Option 02, do substeps 4a-4c  
in reverse order to reinstall the A3 Analog board. Do substeps 3a-3c in  
reverse order to reinstall the A23 Analog board.  
6Ć30  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Connector Module  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
1
a. You will need a screwdriver with a size TĆ9 Torx tip and a  
driver to do this procedure.  
@
Ćinch nut  
2
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Remove frontĆpanel knob: Do the FrontĆpanel Knob procedure, on  
pageĂ6Ć17.  
3. Remove front cover, trim ring, and menu buttons: Do the FrontCover,  
Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons procedure on page 6Ć22.  
4. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the top down on the work  
surface and the right side facing you.  
5. Remove connector module:  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cables at the CH1and CH2 Waveform  
Output connectors. For an AWG2005 with Option 02, disconnect the  
interconnect cables at the CH3 and CH4 Waveform Output connecĆ  
tors.  
b. Using the screwdriver with a size TĆ9 Torx tip, remove the four  
screws attaching the connector module to the chassis. See Figure  
6Ć13.  
6. Remove BNC connector:  
a. To remove a BNC connector, remove the nut attaching the BNC  
1
connector to the panel using a  
the BNC connector from the panel.  
@
Ćinch nut driver, and then remove  
2
7. Reinstallation:  
a. Install BNC connector: Do substep 6a, reversing the order of the  
items in the substep.  
b. Install connector module: Install the connector module by doing  
substeps 5a-5b in reverse order.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Connector Module  
Nuts  
Screws (TĆ9)  
Figure 6Ć13:ăConnector Module Removal  
6Ć32  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Fan and Fan Frame  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
a. No tools are needed to do this procedure.  
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the left side facing you.  
3. Remove fan and fan frame:  
a. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cable from J3 of the power  
supply module. See Figure 6Ć14.  
b. As shown in Figure 6Ć14, slide (2) in the direction indicated by arrow  
(1) while pushing it, and then remove the fan and fan frame.  
c. Release the four hooks securing the fan, separate the fan and fan  
frame.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Fan  
Fan Frame  
To Power  
Supply (J3)  
(1) Push  
(2) Slide  
(1) Push  
Figure 6Ć14:ăFan and Fan Frame Removal  
4. Reinstallation:  
a. Secure the fan to the fan frame.  
b. Connect the cable (J3) to power supply module.  
c. Align the four protrusions of the fan frame with the holes of the  
chassis, slide the fan and fan frame to the lower left, and then install  
them.  
6Ć34  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Rear Shield Cover  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
1
a. You will need a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, a / Ćinch nut  
4
1
driver, a 5 mm nut driver and a / Ćinch nut driver to do this proceĆ  
2
dure.  
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the back facing you (see Figure 6Ć15).  
3. Remove rear shield cover:  
a. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cable from J30 on the A6 CPU  
board. See Figure 6Ć21.  
b. Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the five screws  
securing the rear shield cover to the chassis from the back side.  
c. Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the five screws  
securing the rear shield cover to the chassis from the left side.  
1
d. Using a / Ćinch nut driver, remove the IEEE STD 488 PORT cover by  
4
removing the two spacer posts.  
e. Grasp the serial interface connector, pull the rear shield cover toĆ  
ward you taking care not to damage the cable.  
f. Disconnect the interconnect cables at the CH1/CH2 MARKER OUT,  
CLOCK IN/OUT and CONTROL SIG IN/OUT BNC connectors. For an  
AWG2005 with Option 02, disconnect the interconnect cables at the  
CH3 and CH4 MARKER OUT BNC connectors.  
g. You can remove the rear panel of a slot in which no board is  
mounted.  
1
4. Remove BNC connector: Use a / Ćinch nut driver to remove the nut  
2
attaching the BNC connector to the panel; then, remove the BNC conĆ  
nector from the panel.  
5. Remove serial interface connector: Use a 5 mm nut driver to remove the  
nut attaching the connector to the rear shield cover; then, remove the  
connector.  
6. Reinstallation:  
a. Install the serial interface connector if you removed it by reversing  
the items in step 5.  
b. Install the BNC connector if you removed it by reversing the items in  
step 4.  
c. Install the rear shield cover by doing substeps 3aĆ3g in reverse  
order.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Rear Shield Cover  
A6 Cpu Board  
J30  
RS-232-C Interface Connector  
Screws (T-15)  
Rear Panel  
IEEE STD 488 PORT Cover  
Screws (T-15)  
Figure 6Ć15:ăRear Shield Cover Removal  
6Ć36  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Rear BNC Connectors  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
1
a. You will need a  
@
Ćinch openĆend wrench to do this procedure.  
2
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4. (An instrument with Option 05 has an addiĆ  
tional BNC connector.)  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the top down on the work  
surface and the left side facing you (see Figure 6Ć16).  
3. Remove rear BNC connectors:  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cables at the CH1 AM IN and CH1 ADD  
IN connectors.  
b. Using the openĆend wrench, remove the nut securing the BNC  
connectors to the chassis. Then, lift the BNC connectors out of the  
chassis to complete the removal.  
c. For and instrument with Option 05, remove the SWEEP OUT conĆ  
nector using the same procedure.  
4. Reinstallation: Install the rear BNC connectors by doing substeps 3a and  
3b in reverse order.  
SWEEP OUT  
Connector  
(Option 05)  
ADD IN  
Connector  
Disconnect  
AM IN  
Connector  
Figure 6Ć16:ăRear BNC Connectors Removal  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Power Supply Module  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: You will need a  
screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip to do this procedure. Locate the  
modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal Modules, in  
Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the left side facing you.  
3. Remove power supply module:  
a. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cable at J1, J3, J4, and J5 on  
the power supply module. See Figure 6Ć17.  
b. Disconnect the flat cable at J2 on the power supply module.  
c. Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the two screws  
attaching the power supply module to chassis.  
6Ć38  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
J1  
Screws (TĆ15)  
J5  
J2  
Power Supply Module  
J4  
J3  
Figure 6Ć17:ăPower Supply Module Removal  
4. Reinstallation: Do substeps 3a-3c in reverse order to reinstall the power  
supply module.  
AUX Power Board and AC Inlet  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
5
a. You will need a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, a  
driver and a soldering iron to do this procedure.  
@ Ćinch nut  
16  
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
2. Remove fan and fan frame: Do the Fan and Fan Frame procedure on  
page6Ć33.  
3. Orient instrument: Set theAWG2005 with thebottom down on thework  
surfaceand theback facing you (seeFigure6Ć18).  
4. Remove the power supply module: Do the procedure, Power Supply  
Module, on page6Ć38.  
5. Remove AC inlet:  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cable at CN1 on the AUX Power board.  
5
b. Using a  
@
Ćinch nut driver, removethenut attaching theground wire  
16  
to thechassis.  
c. Remove the two insulating tubes of cables attached to the AC inlet.  
d. Unsolder the three interconnect cables attached to the AC inlet.  
e. Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip, remove the two screws  
securing the AC inlet to the chassis.  
6. Remove AUX Power board:  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cable at CN2 on the AUX Power board.  
b. Removethethreescrews attaching theAUX Power board to the  
chassis.  
c. Lift the AUX Power board up and away from the chassis to complete  
theremoval.  
6Ć40  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
CN2  
Screws (TĆ15)  
CN1  
Ground Wire  
AUX Power Board  
AC Inlet  
Screws (TĆ15)  
Figure 6Ć18:ăAUX Power Board and AC Inlet Removal  
7. Reinstallation:  
a. Install the AUX Power board by doing substeps 6a and 6c in reverse  
order.  
b. Install the AC Inlet by doing substeps 5a-5e in reverse order.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Monitor Module and CRT Frame  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
a. You will need a screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip to do this proceĆ  
dure.  
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Remove front cover, trim ring, and menu buttons: Do the FrontCover,  
Trim Ring, and Menu Buttons procedure on page 6Ć22.  
3. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the bottom down on the work  
surface and the left side facing you.  
4. Remove monitor module:  
NOTE  
Take care not to damage the CRT surface when installing or removĆ  
ing the monitor module.  
a. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cable at J901 on the monitor  
module. See Figure 6Ć19.  
b. Remove the five screws securing the monitor module top and botĆ  
tom to the chassis.  
c. Release the snap at the right of the frontĆpanel module and shift the  
assembly. Insert the screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip into the  
right hole of the chassis, and then remove the screw securing the  
monitor module.  
d. Lift the monitor module up and away from the chassis to complete  
the removal.  
6Ć42  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Screws (TĆ15)  
Monitor Module  
J901  
Screw (TĆ15)  
Screws (TĆ15)  
Figure 6Ć19:ăMonitor Module Removal  
5. Remove CRT frame: Grasp the upper part of the CRT frame and take it  
out as shown in Figure 6Ć20.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
CRT Frame  
Figure 6Ć20:ăCRT Frame Removal  
6. Reinstallation:  
a. Grasp the upper part of the CRT frame, align the notch of the chasĆ  
sis with the protrusion of the CRT frame, and place the CRT frame in  
the chassis.  
b. Install the monitor module bydoing substeps 4a-4d in reverse  
order.  
6Ć44  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Circuit Boards  
This procedure describes how to remove these circuit boards:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A6 CPUBoard  
A2 AWG Board  
A11 D/A Board  
A1 Clock Board  
For Option 02: A2 AWG Board and A11 D/A Board  
For Option 04: A25 Digital Data Out Board  
For Option 05: A31 Clock Sweep Board  
For Option 09: A7 Floating Point Processor Board  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: No tools are  
needed; however, the maintenance kit includes an ejector that is useful  
in removing circuit boards from the chassis. Locate the modules to be  
removed in the locator diagram, Internal Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Remove the rear shield cover: Do the procedure, Rear Shield Cover, on  
page 6Ć35.  
3. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the left side down on the work  
surface and the bottom facing you.  
4. Remove board support: Remove the board support upward while pushĆ  
ing its hook to the inside.  
5. Remove A6 CPU board: This circuit board is installed in the second slot  
from the top.  
CAUTION  
To avoid permanent loss of waveform files, note the following: A  
lithium battery which maintains the nonvolatile memory during  
powerĆoff time is located on the A5 Backplane board. The nonvolaĆ  
tile memory that contains the waveforms and their setup parameter  
data is located onthe A6 CPU board. Removing either board will  
cause the waveform files, sequence files, and autostep files in  
nonvolatile memory to be permanently lost. Before removing either  
the A6 CPU board or the A5 Backplane board, save the waveform  
files, sequence files, and autostep files in the instrument nonvolatile  
memory to a floppy disk. Then, after reinstalling the board(s),  
reload the files into nonvolatile memory.  
a. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cable at J50 and J64 on the  
A6ĂCPUboard (see Figure 6Ć21).  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
)
Board Support  
Hook  
J50  
J64  
J210  
(Option 04)  
J210  
J75  
J110  
(Option 04)  
J210  
A7 Floating Point  
Processor (Option 09)  
or  
(2) Pull  
(1) Up  
A25 Digital Data  
Out Board (Option 04)  
J30  
A6 CPU Board  
(Second Slot)  
J300  
J110  
J110  
A2 AWG and  
A11 D/A Board  
(Option 02)  
J360  
A2 AWG and  
J400  
A11 D/A Board  
J300  
J410  
J430  
J200  
A1 Clock  
or  
A31 Clock Sweep  
Board (Option 05)  
J400  
CH4 MARKER OUT  
J420  
A23 Analog Board  
or  
A3 Analog Board  
(Option 02)  
J100  
CH2 MARKER OUT  
CH3 MARKER OUT  
CH1 MARKER OUT  
Figure 6Ć21:ăBoard Removal  
b. Disconnect the flat cable at J75 on the A6 CPU board. Remove the  
flat cable as shown in Figure 6Ć21.  
c. Grasp the upper part of the A6 CPU board, and pull upward to  
remove it.  
6Ć46  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
6. Remove A2 AWG board and A11 D/A board: This circuit board is installed  
in fourth slot from the top.  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cables at J100 and J200 on the A23  
Analog board (see Figure 6Ć21).  
b. Disconnect the interconnect cables at the CH1 MARKER OUT and  
CH2 MARKER OUT connectors.  
c. For the instrument with Option 04 installed, disconnect the flat  
cables at J110 and J210 on the A11 D/A board.  
d. Grasp the upper part of the A2 AWG board and the A11 D/A board  
and pull upward to remove them.  
7. Remove A1 Clock board: This circuit board is installed in the fifth slot  
from the top.  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cables at J300, J400, J410, J420 and  
J430 on the A1 Clock board (see Figure 6Ć21).  
b. Grasp the upper part of the A1 Clock board and pull upward to  
remove it.  
8. Remove A2 AWG board and A11 D/A board (Option 02): The option adds  
the A2 AWG board and A11 D/A board in the third slot from the top.  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cables at J300 and J400 on the A3  
Analog board (see Figure 6Ć21).  
b. Disconnect the interconnect cables at the CH3 MARKER OUT and  
CH4 MARKER OUT connectors.  
c. Grasp the upper part of the A2 AWG board and the A11 D/A board  
and pull upward to remove them.  
9. Remove A25 Digital Data Out board (Option 04): The option adds the  
A25 Digital Data Out board in the first slot from the top.  
a. Disconnect the flat cables at J110 and J210 on the A25 Digital Data  
Out board (see Figure 6Ć21).  
b. Grasp the upper part of the A25 Digital Data Out board, and pull it  
upward to remove it.  
10. Remove A31 Clock Sweepboard (Option 05): This option replaces A1  
Clock board with A31 Clock Sweep board.  
a. Disconnect the interconnect cables at J300, J360, J400, J410, J420  
and J430 on the A31 Clock board (see Figure 6Ć21).  
b. Grasp the upper part of the A31 Clock board and pull upward to  
remove it.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
11. Remove A7 Floating Point Processor board (Option 09): The option adds  
the A7 Floating Point Processor board in the first slot from the top.  
a. Grasp the upper part of the A7 Floating Point Processor board and  
pull itupward to remove it(see Figure 6Ć21).  
12. Reinstallation: Do the board removal procedures in reverse order, reversĆ  
ing the order of the items in each procedure.  
6Ć48  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
A5 Backplane Board  
CAUTION  
To avoid the permanent loss of waveform files, note the following: A  
lithium battery which maintains the nonvolatile memory during  
powerĆoff time is located on the A5 Backplane board. The nonvolaĆ  
tile memory that contains the waveforms and their setup parameter  
data is located on the A6 CPU board. Removing either board will  
cause the waveform files, sequence files, and autostep files in  
nonvolatile memory to be permanently lost. Before removing either  
the A6 CPU board or the A5 Backplane board, save the waveform  
files, sequence files, and autostep files in the instrument nonvolatile  
memory to a floppy disk. Then, after reinstalling the board(s),  
reload the files into nonvolatile memory.  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
1
a. You will needa screwdriver with a size TĆ15 Torx tip anda  
nut driver to do this procedure.  
/ Ćinch  
4
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Orient instrument: Set the AWG2005 with the left side down on the work  
surface andthe top facing you.  
3. Remove A23 Analog board or A3 Analog board (Option 02): Do the  
procedure, A23 Analog board or A3 Analog board, on page 6Ć29.  
4. Remove all circuit boards: Do the procedure, Circuit Boards, on page  
6Ć45.  
5. Remove A5 Backplane board:  
a. Remove the five screws anda nut securing the shieldcover (see  
Figure 6Ć22).  
b. Grasp the shieldcover, andtake it out.  
c. Disconnect the ribbon interconnect cables at J8 on the A5 BackĆ  
plane board(see Figure 6Ć22).  
d. Disconnect the flat cable at J6 on the A5 Backplane board.  
e. Remove the remaining four screws securing the A5 Backplane  
boardto the chassis.  
f. Lift the A5 Backplane boardsideways, andthen take it out.  
6. Reinstallation:  
a. Install the A5 Backplane board: Do substeps 5a-5f in reverse order  
to install the board.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
b. Install the other boards: Do the procedure, Circuit Boards, on  
page 6Ć45, in reverse order, reversing the items in each step.  
Screws (T-15)  
Screws (T-15)  
J5  
J4  
J3  
J2  
J1  
J7  
J6  
J8  
A5 Backplane Board  
Figure 6Ć22:ăA5 Backplane Board Removal  
6Ć50  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Lithium Battery  
WARNING  
To avoid the risk of fire or explosion, install a new battery that has  
the same part number as listed in section 10, Mechanical Parts List,  
for a replacement battery.  
To avoid the risk of fire or explosion, do not recharge, rapidly  
discharge, or disassemble the battery, heat it above 100° C, or  
incinerate it.  
Dispose of used batteries promptly. Small quantities of used batterĆ  
ies may be disposed of in normal refuse. Keep lithium batteries  
away fromchildren.  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
a. You will need a soldering iron to do this procedure.  
b. You will also need a replacement lithium battery having the part  
number listed in section 10, Mechanical Parts List.  
c. Locate the battery to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal  
Modules, in Figure 6Ć4.  
2. Remove A5 Backplane board: Do the A5 Backplane Board procedure on  
page 6Ć49.  
3. Orient board: Set the A5 Backplane board on an insulating surface.  
4. Remove used battery:  
a. Unsolder the tabs at the ends of the battery, taking care not to heat  
the battery (see Figure 6Ć23).  
b. Grasp the battery, and lift it away from the board.  
5. Install new battery:  
a. Place the new battery on the board with the negative tab of the  
battery closest to the board edge connector.  
b. Solder the tabs to the board.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
Lithium Battery  
Figure 6Ć23:ăBattery Location on the A5 Backplane Board  
6Ć52  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
FloppyĆdisk Drive Module  
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:  
a. You will need a screwdriver with a size TĆ10 Torx tip and a size  
#1ĂPhillips tip to do this procedure.  
b. Locatethemodules to beremoved in thelocator diagram,  
Modules, in Figure6Ć4.  
Internal  
2. Remove rear shield cover: Do the RearShield Cover procedure on  
pageĂ6Ć35.  
3. Remove A23 Analog board or A3 Analog board (Option 02): Do theA23  
Analog board or A3 Analog board procedure on pageĂ6Ć29, removing  
theA23 Analog board or A3 Analog board.  
4. Orient instrument: Set theAWG2005 with theleft sidedown on thework  
surfaceand thebottom facing you.  
5. Remove all circuit boards: Do the procedure, Circuit Boards, on  
pageĂ6Ć45.  
6. Remove floppyĆdisk drive module:  
a. Using a screwdriver with a size TĆ10 Torx tip, remove the six screws  
securing thefloppyĆdisk drivecover to thechassis (seeFigure6Ć24).  
b. Disconnect theflat cableof thefloppy disk drive.  
c. Using a screwdriver with a size #1 Phillips tip, remove the three  
screws securing the floppyĆdisk drive to the bracket.  
d. Using a screwdriver with a size #1 Phillips tip, remove the three  
screws securing the spacer to floppyĆdisk drive.  
e. Grasp the upper part of the floppyĆdisk, and pull it upward to reĆ  
moveit.  
7. Reinstallation:  
a. Install floppyĆdisk drive module: Do substeps 6a-6e in reverse  
order.  
b. Install circuit boards: Do the procedure, Circuit Boards, on  
pageĂ6Ć45, in reverse order.  
c. Install A23 Analog board: Do thepart on removing theA23 Analog  
board on page 6Ć29 in reverse order. This completes the reinstallaĆ  
tion.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal and Installation Procedures  
FloppyĆdisk Drive Cover  
Screws (#1)  
Screws (#1)  
Flat Cable  
FloppyĆdisk  
Drive Bracket  
FloppyĆdisk  
Drive  
Screws (TĆ10)  
Screws (#1)  
Screws (#1)  
Spacer  
Screws (TĆ10)  
Figure 6Ć24:ăFloppyĆdisk Drive Module Removal  
6Ć54  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repackaging  
This subsection contains information about repackaging the AWG2005 for  
shipment.  
Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton having a test strength of at  
least 275 pounds and with an inside dimension at least six inches greater  
than the AWG2005 dimensions. (If available, use the original shipping carĆ  
ton, which meets these requirements.)  
Repackaging  
Instructions  
If the AWG2005 is shipped to a Tektronix Service Center, enclose the followĆ  
ing information:  
H
H
H
H
H
The owner's address  
Name and phone number of a contact person  
Type and serial number of the AWG2005  
Reason for returning  
A complete description of the service required  
Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping tape.  
Markthe address of the Tektronix Service Center and your own return adĆ  
dress on the shipping carton in two prominent locations.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repackaging  
6Ć56  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
This subsection contains information and procedures designed to isolate  
faulty modules in the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. If these  
procedures indicate a module needs to be replaced, follow the Removal and  
Installation Procedures, preceding.  
The troubleshooting procedures consist of these flowcharts.  
Troubleshooting  
Procedures  
H
H
H
Figure 6Ć25: Primary Troubleshooting Procedure  
Figure 6Ć27: Troubleshooting Procedure 1 Ċ Power Supply Module  
Figure 6Ć30: Troubleshooting Procedure 2 Ċ A6 CPU Board or FrontĆ  
panel Module  
H
H
Figure 6Ć32: Troubleshooting Procedure 3 Ċ Monitor Module  
Figure 6Ć36: Troubleshooting Procedure 4 Ċ Module Isolation  
To use these procedures, begin with the Primary Troubleshooting ProceĆ  
dure. It prompts you to check various indications of AWG2005 functionality  
and directs you to the other troubleshooting procedures.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
The AWG2005 has internal diagnostics that verify circuit functionality. The  
AWG2005 automatically executes the internal diagnostics at powerĆon. You  
can also run the internal diagnostics by using the UTILITY menu. See  
Checking Diagnostics Tests below. The difference between the two methods  
of running the internal diagnostics routine is that the powerĆon method does  
not do as much memory checking.  
AWG2005  
Diagnostics  
If the internal diagnostics indicate a test in the internal diagnostics failed,  
use the troubleshooting procedures in this subsection to determine which  
module to replace.  
Checking Diagnostics Tests  
Prerequisites Ċ Power on the AWG2005 and allow a 20 minute warmup  
before doing this procedure.  
1. Push the UTILITY! Diag/Cal! Diagnostics  
2. Select All with the general purpose knob.  
3. Select Execute from the side menu. This executes all the diagnostics  
automatically. As each test finishes, the result is displayed on the  
screen.  
4. Check the diagnostic test results. If any test failed, go to TroubleshootĆ  
ing Procedure 4 Ċ Module Isolation on page 6Ć68. The table in the  
flowchart shows which module is related to each diagnostic test. If the  
tests pass but there is still a problem, go to the Primary Troubleshooting  
Procedure on page 6Ć59.  
6Ć58  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Press the PRINCIPAL  
POWER SWITCH on the rear  
panel of the AWG2005.  
Power off and remove the  
cover using the Rear Cover  
and Cabinet removal  
Perform the power  
supply module  
troubleshooting  
procedure 1  
procedure. Check all the  
cables coming out of the  
power supply module and  
the cabling between  
Can you  
No  
hear the fan  
Push the ON/STBY  
button. Can you  
hear the fan now?  
No  
whirling?  
(page 6Ć61).  
modules. Be sure every  
cable is attached securely.  
Yes  
Yes  
With the  
AWG2005 power on,  
do the front panel  
lights come on and  
then go off a short time  
later?  
Perform the front  
panel module  
troubleshooting  
procedure 2  
No  
(page 6Ć63).  
Replace the A6  
CPUboard  
(page 6Ć45).  
Yes  
Yes  
Does the  
display  
Power off the  
AWG2005 and remove  
the cabinet using the  
Rear Cover and  
No  
Does the  
red LED on the  
A6 CPUboard  
(See Figure  
6Ć26) light?  
Perform the monitor  
module  
seem to be  
working at  
all?  
No  
troubleshooting  
procedure 3  
(page 6Ć65).  
Cabinet removal  
procedure.  
Yes  
Does the  
Perform the power  
supply module  
troubleshooting  
procedure 1  
AWG2005 respond  
correctly when the  
front panel buttons  
are pushed?  
No  
(page 6Ć61).  
Yes  
Does the  
No  
AWG2005 power  
on and pass all the  
diagnostics?  
Perform the module isolation  
troubleshooting procedure 4  
(page 6Ć68).  
Yes  
Done.  
Figure 6Ć25:ăPrimaryTroubleshooting Procedure  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Red LED  
J50  
Green LED  
1
Figure 6Ć26:ăCPU Board  
6Ć60  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Use this procedure to  
troubleshoot the power  
supply module.  
Is the PRINCIPAL  
POWER SWITCH in  
the on (in) position?  
No  
Switch the PRINCIPAL  
POWER SWITCH to the  
on (in) position?  
Yes  
Switch the PRINCIPAL  
POWER SWITCH to the  
off (out) position. Replace  
the fuse. Switch the  
Disconnect the cable from  
J1 on the power supply  
module (see Figure 6Ć29).  
Replace the fuse.  
Is  
Does the  
fuse blow  
again?  
No  
Yes  
line fuse  
ok?  
PRINCIPAL POWER  
SWITCH to the on (in)  
position (see Figure 6Ć28).  
Yes  
No  
Replace the AUX  
Power board  
Does  
the fuse  
blow?  
Yes  
(page 6Ć39) and the  
cables going to it.  
No  
Replace the power  
supply module.  
Is there  
Is there  
power at the  
90-250 VAC at J1  
pins 1 and 3 on the  
power supply module  
(see Fig.Ă6Ć29)?  
Is there  
No  
90-250 VAC  
No  
No  
Fix the power problem.  
line cord and  
outlet?  
at the AC Inlet?  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Replace the AC Inlet (page 6Ć39).  
Replace the AUX Power board (page 6Ć39).  
Replace the power supply module (page 6Ć38).  
Figure 6Ć27:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 1 Ċ Power Supply Module  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Fuse  
PRINCIPAL  
POWER Switch  
Figure 6Ć28:ăAUX Power Board  
J1  
Figure 6Ć29:ăPower Supply Module  
6Ć62  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Use this procedure to  
determine if the A6 CPU board  
or the frontĆpanel module is  
bad.  
Turn on the PRINCIPAL  
POWER SWITCH.  
Do all  
front panel LEDs  
turn on and then turn  
off a short time  
later?  
No  
Push the ON/STBY  
button.  
Yes  
Is there  
Do all  
front panel LEDs  
turn on and then turn  
off a short time  
later?  
Do the  
front panel  
LEDs turn  
on?  
5 Vbetween  
TP101 (GND) and  
TP100 (see Figure  
6Ć31)?  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Replace the  
front panel  
module  
(page 6Ć24).  
Does one front  
panel LED turn on and  
then turn off, followed by the next  
LED until all LEDs have  
turned on and then  
No  
turned off?  
Are all front  
panel cables securely  
No  
Securely install and/  
or replace the front  
panel cables.  
installed in their sockets  
and are the  
cables ok?  
Yes  
The front panel  
module is ok.  
Yes  
Replace the A6 CPU  
board (page 6Ć45).  
Figure 6Ć30:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 2 Ċ A6 CPU Board or FrontĆpanel Module  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
TP101 (GND)  
TP100 (5V)  
Figure 6Ć31:ăKey Board  
6Ć64  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
This procedure helps you  
determine whether the monitor  
module is bad.  
Do pins 4  
and 6 of J901 have  
signals similar to  
Figure 6Ć34?  
Replace the  
monitor  
module  
Yes  
(page 6Ć42).  
Do the  
Yes  
horizontal and  
/or vertical sync  
lock ok?  
No  
Power the AWG2005 off and  
disconnect the cable from J901 on  
the monitor module (see Figure 6Ć33)  
then power back on.  
No  
Do pins  
4 and 6 of the cable  
have signals similar  
to Figure  
Power the AWG2005 off and  
disconnect the cable from J901 on  
the monitor module (see Figure 6Ć33)  
then power back on.  
Yes  
6Ć34?  
No  
Does  
pin 9 of the cable  
have a video signal with  
Is pin1 of  
the cable at  
+15V?  
Yes  
Yes  
Do pins 2  
and 4 of J50 on  
the same levels as  
in Figure  
6Ć35?  
No  
the A6 CPU board (see  
Figure 6Ć26) have signals  
similar to Figure  
6Ć34?  
No  
No  
Replace the  
monitor  
module  
Yes  
Replace the cable.  
(page 6Ć42).  
Are the  
cables securely  
installed in their sockets  
and are the cables  
ok?  
No  
Does  
J50 pin 7 on  
the A6 CPU board (see  
Figure 6Ć26) have a video  
signal with the  
same levels as  
in Figure  
Replace the A6  
CPU board  
(page 6Ć45).  
No  
Securely install  
and/or replace  
the cables.  
Yes  
6Ć35?  
Yes  
Perform the power  
supply module  
troubleshooting  
procedure 1  
Replace the cable.  
Replace the A6  
Is the  
problem  
fixed?  
(page 6Ć61).  
No  
CPU (page 6Ć45)  
or A5 Backplane board  
(page 6Ć49).  
Yes  
Done  
Figure 6Ć32:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 3 Ċ Monitor Module  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
J901  
Figure 6Ć33:ăMonitor Module  
J901 pin 4 (Horizontal Sync)  
31.75 kHz Rate  
1
J901 pin 6 (Vertical Sync)  
60 Hz Rate  
2
Ch1  
2.00V  
M 20.0us  
Ch2  
Ch2  
2.00V  
1.60V  
Figure 6Ć34:ăHorizontal and Vertical Sync Signals  
6Ć66  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
White Level  
J901 pin 9 (Video)  
Black Level  
1
Ch1  
316mV  
M 10.0us  
200mV  
Ch1  
Figure 6Ć35:ăA Video Signal with White and Black Levels  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
6Ć67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
This procedure assumes that the  
AWG2005 is running and you can  
read the display.  
Select the diagnostics menu  
in the UTILITY menu and run  
all the tests (see the  
Does  
the display  
Are  
any failures  
reported?  
No  
No  
The AWG2005 is ok.  
report any  
errors?  
discussion of the  
diagnostics on page 6Ć58).  
Yes  
Yes  
Diagnostics  
Cpu  
Related Module  
A6 CPU board (page 6Ć45)  
Clock  
A1 Clock board (page 6Ć45)  
A31 Clock Sweep board (page 6Ć45)  
Display  
A6 CPU board (page 6Ć45)  
FPP (Option 09)  
Front Panel  
Trigger  
A7 Floating Point Processor board (page 6Ć45)  
Front Panel (page 6Ć24)  
A1 Clock board (page 6Ć45)  
A31 Clock Sweep board (page 6Ć45) (Option 05)  
Setup  
CH1/CH2  
A2 AWG board (page 6Ć45)  
A11 D/A board (page 6Ć45)  
A23 Analog board (page 6Ć29)  
Setup  
CH3/CH4  
(Option 02)  
A2 AWG board (page 6Ć45)  
A11 D/A board (page 6Ć45)  
A3 Analog board (page 6Ć29)  
Waveform Memory  
CH1/CH2  
A2 AWG board (page 6Ć45)  
Waveform Memory  
CH3/CH4 (Option 02)  
A2 AWG board (page 6Ć45)  
Check all cables. Be sure every  
cable is attached securely. Replace  
the module indicated in the  
diagnostics. Run all diagnostics.  
Can  
the data be  
read or written  
from/to formatted  
floppy  
Does  
the display  
Replace the  
floppyĆdisk drive  
module (page 6Ć53).  
No  
No  
report any  
errors?  
disk?  
Yes  
Yes  
Done.  
Figure 6Ć36:ăTroubleshooting Procedure 4 Ċ Module Isolation  
6Ć68  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
This section describes the various options as well as the standard and  
optional accessories that are available for the AWG2005 Arbitrary Waveform  
Generator.  
Options include:  
List of Options  
H
H
Option 02 Ċ adds CH3 and CH4 output.  
Option 04 Ċ makes digital waveform data available at the rear panel.  
See note, below.  
H
H
Option 05 Ċ adds a clock sweep editor.  
Option 09 Ċ adds a FFT editor, a convolution waveformeditor and  
floatingĆpoint processor. See note, below.  
H
Option 1R Ċ ships the waveformgenerator configured for installation in  
an instrument rack.  
H
H
H
Option 1S Ċ adds the WaveWriter S3FT400.  
Option 95 Ċ ships with a test result report.  
Option A1-A5 Ċ changes the standard power cord to one of five  
alternate power cord configurations.  
H
Option B1 Ċ adds the service manual and the Performance Check  
disk.  
NOTE  
Options 04 and 09 are mutually exclusive.  
Each option is described more fully in the following pages.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
7Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
In place of the standard North American, 110ĂV, 60ĂHz power cord, Tektronix  
ships any of five alternate power cord configurations with the waveform  
generator, as ordered by the customer.  
Options A1-A5  
TableĂ7Ć1:ăInternational Power Cords  
Option  
Power Cord  
Option A1  
Option A2  
Option A3  
Option A4  
Option A5  
Universal European Ċ 220ĂV, 50ĂHz  
United Kingdom Ċ 240ĂV, 50ĂHz  
Australian Ċ 240ĂV, 50ĂHz  
North American Ċ 240ĂV, 60ĂHz  
Switzerland Ċ 220ĂV, 50ĂHz  
This option provides two additional channels (channel 3 and channel 4).  
Also, two additional connectors are added on the rear panel (CH3 MARKER  
OUT and CH4 MARKER OUT). The instrument with Option 02 allows you to  
simultaneously output four different waveforms.  
Option02  
Option04  
With Option 04, the waveform generator can provide the following digital  
signals at the rear panel output connector. This option and Option 09 cannot  
both be installed.  
Data Output  
The data (D0-D11) fed to this instrument's internal D/A converter is buffered  
and connected to the output connector. At the same time that the analog  
waveform is output, the digital output can be obtained. Output will be at the  
TTL level.  
Clock Output  
The same clock that is fed to this instrument's internal D/A converter is  
buffered in the same way as the data and connected to the connector. As in  
the case of data output, clock output will be at the TTL level.  
Figure 7Ć1 is a block diagram of the digital data output Option 04.  
7Ć2  
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
12 Bits  
D / A  
Waveform  
Memory  
12  
Data  
Clock  
Buffer  
12  
12  
12  
Data  
D0~D11  
Latch  
Clock  
CLOCK  
Output  
Connector  
Option 04  
Figure 7Ć1:ăOption 04 Block Diagram  
Output ConnectorConfiguration  
Figure 7Ć2 shows the shape of the output connector and its pin locations.  
Table 7Ć2 lists the output signal for each pin.  
2
26  
25  
2
1
26  
25  
1
CH2 DIGITAL DATA OUT  
CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT  
Figure 7Ć2:ăOption 04 Output Connector  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
7Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
TableĂ7Ć2:ăOption 04 Digital Output Signals  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Number  
Number  
1
3
Data bit 0 (LSB)  
Data bit 1  
15  
17  
Data bit 7  
Data bit 8  
5
Data bit 2  
Data bit 3  
Data bit 4  
Data bit 5  
Data bit 6  
19  
21  
23  
24  
Data bit 9  
7
Data bit 10  
Data bit 11 (MSB)  
Clock  
9
11  
13  
Pins other than above are connected to ground. The pin assignments are identical for both  
CH1 and CH2.  
Operation  
Basically, operations are in correspondence with analogoutput for the  
AWG2005 arbitrary waveform generator. When a waveform is not being  
output, the waveform's initial data may be output to the connector. At this  
time, the clock is not generated.  
When startingthe waveform output, the clock is generated and the data is  
updated.  
NOTE  
Excess output can be generated in the data clock (see Figure 7Ć3)  
when loading a new waveform into waveform memory, when resetĆ  
ting the waveform memory, or during the hold off.  
7Ć4  
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
Load, reset, hold–off period:  
Excess output can occur in  
these periods.  
Trigger  
Signal  
Waveform  
Figure 7Ć3:ăGeneration of Excess Output  
Output Circuit and Output Waveform  
Figure 7Ć4 shows a diagram of the output circuit. After first passing through  
an output resistance of 50 , the buffer output proceeds to the output conĆ  
nectors. The AWG2005 can be used without terminating the receiving (user)  
side with a resistance of 50 , but when waveform distortion is greater the  
50 termination is required.  
50 W  
Buffer  
( 50 W )  
50 W  
Buffer  
( 50 W )  
Figure 7Ć4:ăOutput Circuit  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
7Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
The skew of the data output is held to "15 ns. The rising and falling times  
will depend on the bufferICs, but neitheris greaterthan 4 ns. See Figure  
7Ć5. This figure shows the specifications for the waveform at the output  
connectorwhen a cable is not being used.  
Rise Time  
Fall Time  
Rise Time / Fall Time :  
Measure the time for the  
waveform to go from 10%  
to 90% of its peak value ;  
must be no greater than 4 ns.  
Clock  
Level High : 4 V ~  
Data  
Level Low : ~ 0.8 V  
Skew : Measure at 50% level of the waveform :  
must be no greater than " 15 ns.  
Figure 7Ć5:ăOutput Waveform  
If a cable is used these waveforms have transmission distortion. It is necesĆ  
sary to latch the data with a clock before using the waveform in actual  
circuits at the cable receiving side (user side) and to reproduce the waveĆ  
form. Delay the clock with the delay line in order to reproduce the data  
reliably (see Figure 7Ć6).  
12  
12  
12  
Latch  
Buffer  
Buffer  
Data  
Delay Line  
Clock  
0 ~ 20 ns  
Figure 7Ć6:ăData Latching  
7Ć6  
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
Cable  
Option 04 comes with a digital data out cable. The cable connecting the  
AWG2005 rear panel output connectors and the user circuit is extremely  
critical for operation at the maximum clock frequency. Figure 7Ć7 shows the  
digital data out cable provided as a standard accessory and the receiving  
connector.  
Connector : Female  
Connector : Female  
Flat Cable  
Figure 7Ć7:ăDigital Data Out Cable  
If you use a cable other than the one provided as the standard accessory  
the cable must meet the following conditions.  
H
H
It must be a coaxial cable with a characteristic impedance of 50Ăfor all  
DATA and CLOCK lines.  
Keep cables as short as possible. The acceptable length depends on  
the characteristics of the coaxial cable used, but lengths under 1Ămeter  
are preferable.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
7Ć7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
Application Suggestions  
Waveform Regeneration Ċ In some cases even a cable that has been  
carefully made will create transmission distortion. Figure 7Ć8 shows an  
example of a circuit used to regenerate the waveform.  
Delay Line  
Clock  
GND  
D0  
D1  
0 ~ 20 ns  
50 W  
D7  
D0  
50 W  
GND  
D8  
D11  
D11  
50 W  
GND  
Figure 7Ć8:ăWaveform Reproduction Circuit Example  
NOTE  
Tektronix cannot be responsible for the infringement of any thirdĆ  
party industrial proprietary rights, copyrights, or other rights arising  
from the use of these circuits.  
NOTE  
The ECB is a multiĆlayer board. One layer is used as ground and  
the other as the power supply. The data lines are wired to the same  
length so that their delay times will be the same.  
7Ć8  
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
This optionprovides a clock sweep editor. Inadditionto performing linear  
sweep and log sweep for the clock frequency, the clock sweep editor enĆ  
ables you to easily create arbitrary sweep.  
Option 05  
This option provides increased internal calculation speed and two additional  
editors: an FFT editor and a convolution editor.  
Option 09  
Option 1R  
For Option 1R, the waveform generator is configured for installation in a  
19Ćinch wide instrument rack. In this configuration, the floppy disk drive is  
mounted on the front panel. To change an AWG2005 into a rackmount  
version, contact your closest Tektronix representative.  
WaveWriter is anapplicationprogram used to create waveforms for adĆ  
vanced signal generating and processing instruments. Many Tektronix  
instruments, such as arbitrary waveform generators and oscilloscopes with  
the saveĆonĆdelta" feature, are enhanced by this program. WaveWriter  
helps users configure waveforms with a minimum of effort.  
Option 1S  
With the WaveWriter package, you cancreate new waveforms or edit waveĆ  
forms acquired from various instrument sources. WaveWriter gives you  
interactive control of the waveform generating process. WaveWriter operates  
withinthe Microsoft Windows TM environment.  
A test result report will be provided with the AWG2005 whenthis optionis  
specified.  
Option 95  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
7Ć9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
Accessories  
Standard Accessories  
The following standard accessories are provided with each instrument:  
TableĂ7Ć3:ăStandard Accessories List  
Qty  
1
Description  
Part Number  
070Ć8958Ć50  
070Ć8657ĆXX  
User manual  
1
Programmer manual  
1
GPIB Programming Examples Disk, 3.5Ćinch 063Ć1708ĆXX  
media  
1
Sample Waveform Library Disk, 3.5Ćinch  
media  
063Ć1704ĆXX  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Power cable  
161Ć0230Ć01  
159Ć0239ĆXX  
200Ć2264ĆXX  
159Ć0210ĆXX  
200Ć2265ĆXX  
Fuse (6ĂA, 250ĂV, fastĆblow) (UL 198G/3AG)  
Fuse cap  
Fuse 5ĂA (T) (IEC127)  
Fuse cap  
Certificate of Calibration  
Optional Accessories  
The following optional accessories are recommended for use with the instruĆ  
ment:  
TableĂ7Ć4:ăOptional Accessories List  
Qty  
1
Description  
Part Number  
070Ć8962Ć50  
063Ć1706ĆXX  
200Ć3232ĆXX  
016Ć1159ĆXX  
012Ć0991ĆXX  
012Ć1342ĆXX  
011Ć0049ĆXX  
067Ć1396ĆXX  
Service manual  
1
Performance check disk  
Front cover  
1
1
Accessory pouch  
GPIB cable  
1
1
50ĂBNC cable  
50ĂBNC terminator  
Maintenance kit (see Table 7Ć5)  
1
1
7Ć10  
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
TableĂ7Ć5:ăMaintenance Kit Contents  
Qty  
1
Description  
Part Number  
671Ć2331ĆXX  
671Ć2487ĆXX  
198Ć5802ĆXX  
003Ć1315ĆXX  
131Ć5537ĆXX  
131Ć1315ĆXX  
ExtenderĆA board (for slot 1, 2, 3, 4)  
ExtenderĆB board (for slot 5)  
Cable kit  
1
1
1
Ejector  
1
Header  
1
Connector (PELTOLAĆtoĆBNC)  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
7Ć11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options and Accessories  
7Ć12  
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical Parts List  
The modules that make up this instrument are often a combination of meĆ  
chanical and electrical subparts. Therefore, all replaceable modules are  
listed in section 10, Mechanical Parts List. Refer to that section for part  
numbers when using this manual.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
8Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical Parts List  
8Ć2  
Electrical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagrams  
This section contains a block diagramand an interconnect diagram. The  
block diagramshows the modules and functional blocks in an AWG2005  
with Option 02, the CH3 and CH4, and Option 04, Digital Data Out, and  
Option 05, Clock Sweep, and Option 09, Floating Point Processor. The  
interconnect diagramshows how the modules in the AWG2005 connect.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
9Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagrams  
9Ć2  
Diagrams  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION 04  
CH1/CH2 DIGITAL OUT  
A25  
DIGITAL DATA OUT  
FROM CH1  
OPTION 02 (ADD CH3/CH4)  
CH4  
OPTION 05  
CH4 OUT  
CH3 OUT  
CH4  
SEQUENCER  
WAVEFORM  
MEMORY  
DAC  
DAC  
FILTER /AMP  
FILTER /AMP  
OFFSET  
OFFSET  
CLOCK  
SWEEP  
OSCILLATOR  
CH3  
WAVEFORM  
MEMORY  
CH3  
SEQUENCER  
A31  
CLOCK SWEEP  
A2  
AWG  
A11  
D/A  
ANALOG PROCESSING  
CH2 OUT  
CH1 OUT  
CH2  
WAVEFORM  
MEMORY  
CH2  
SEQUENCER  
DAC  
DAC  
FILTER /AMP  
FILTER /AMP  
A3/A23  
OFFSET  
OFFSET  
CLOCK  
OSCILLATOR  
CH1  
WAVEFORM  
MEMORY  
CH1  
SEQUENCER  
A1  
CLOCK SWEEP  
A2  
AWG  
A11  
D/A  
ANALOG  
FRONT PANEL  
12 V  
15 V  
-15 V  
5 V  
FAN  
GPIB  
CPU  
AND  
DISPLAY  
CONTROL  
LOW VOLTAGE  
POWER SUPPLY  
RS232C  
MEMORY  
-5 V  
FDD CONTROL  
A12  
KEY  
POWER MODULE  
A6  
CPU  
DISPLAY MONITOR  
VIDEO  
A7  
FLOATING POINT PROCESSOR  
OPTION 09  
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE  
Figure 9Ć1:ăBlock Diagram  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
9Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
9Ć4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A12  
KEYBOARD  
AUX POWER  
BEZEL SWITCH  
S100  
FL100  
NEUTRAL 8Ć9  
W4  
U950  
FDD  
UNIT  
W3  
CN1  
CN2  
10 PIN  
JP301  
S.G.  
LINE  
8Ć9  
U900  
J101  
W7  
MONITOR  
W1  
W664  
10 PIN  
W675  
26 PIN  
DS100  
J901  
1
3
5
GPIB  
J40  
SLOT 2  
RS232C  
10 PIN  
B100  
FAN  
J1  
J3  
J4  
J64  
J75  
2 PIN  
W630  
5 PIN  
W900  
8 PIN  
J30  
J50  
2 PIN  
A6  
CPU  
J10  
J2  
PS920  
A5  
BACKPLANE  
W5  
22 PIN  
J2  
J5  
J6  
J8  
OPTION 02  
OPTION 04  
W10  
POWER SUPPLY  
J7  
J800  
J4  
J5  
J1  
J1  
J3  
J100  
5 PIN  
J100  
J100  
A1  
A2  
A2  
A25  
DIGITAL DATA OUT  
CLOCK  
AWG  
AWG  
(CH3 & CH4)  
J240  
(CH1 & CH2)  
J220  
J420 J430  
J400 J410  
W410  
J300  
W300  
TRIGGER  
J230  
J110  
J10  
J210  
J110  
J10  
J210  
J110  
W1210  
W1110  
W420 W430 W400  
IN OUT  
CLOCK  
IN OUT  
CONTROL  
MARKER 3  
MARKER 4  
MARKER 1  
MARKER 2  
A11  
D/A  
A11  
D/A  
J210  
J110  
OPTION 05  
(CH3 & CH4)  
J200 J100  
(CH1 & CH2)  
J200 J100  
J100  
A31  
CLOCK SWEEP  
OPTION 09  
J420J430  
J400J410  
J360 J300  
W360 W300  
J1  
W420  
W430 W400 W410  
J400  
J300  
J200  
J100  
IN OUT  
CLOCK  
IN OUT SWEEP TRIGGER  
CONTROL  
A7  
FLOATING POINT PROCESSOR  
A3  
ANALOG  
(CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)  
(CH1 & CH2)  
A23  
ANALOG  
J198  
J498  
W498  
CH4 OUT  
J398  
J550  
W550  
ADD IN  
J500  
W500  
AM IN  
J298  
W398  
W298  
W198  
CH1 OUT  
CH3 OUT  
CH2 OUT  
Figure 9Ć2:ăInterconnect Diagram  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
9Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
9Ć6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replaceable Mechanical Parts  
This section contains a list of the replaceable mechanical components for the  
AWG2005. Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.  
PartsOrdering Information  
Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or  
representative.  
Changes to Tektronix products are sometimes made to accommodate improved  
components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest  
improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is important to include the  
following information in your order.  
H
H
H
H
Part number (see Part Number Revision Level below)  
Instrument type or model number  
Instrument serial number  
Instrument modification number, if applicable  
If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part, your  
local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any  
change in part number.  
Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this manual.  
Part Number Revision  
Level  
Tektronix part numbers contain two digits that show the revision level of the  
part. For most parts in this manual, you will find the letters XX in place of the  
revision level number.  
Part Number Revision Level  
Revision Level May Show as XX  
670Ć7918Ć03  
670Ć7918ĆXX  
When you order parts, Tektronix will provide you with the most current part for  
your product type, serial number, and modification (if applicable). At the time of  
your order, Tektronix will determine the part number revision level needed for  
your product, based on the information you provide.  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Using the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List  
The tabular information in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List is arranged for  
quick retrieval. Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you  
find all of the information you need for ordering replacement parts. The  
following table describes the content of each column in the parts list.  
Parts List Column Descriptions  
Column Column Name  
Description  
1
Figure & Index Number  
Items in this section are referenced by figure and index numbers to the exploded view  
illustrations that follow.  
2
Tektronix Part Number  
Serial Number  
Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix.  
3 and 4  
Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective. Column four  
indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued. No entries indicates the part is  
good for all serial numbers.  
5
6
Qty  
This indicates the quantity of parts used.  
Name & Description  
An item name is separated from the description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an  
item name may sometimes appear as incomplete. Use the U.S. Federal Catalog handbook  
H6Ć1 for further item name identification.  
7
8
Mfr. Code  
This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part.  
This indicates the actual manufacturer's or vendor's part number.  
Mfr. Part Number  
Abbreviations  
Chassis Parts  
Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1–1972.  
Chassis-mounted parts and cable assemblies are located at the end of the  
Replaceable Electrical Parts List.  
Mfr. Code to Manufacturer  
Cross Index  
The table titled Manufacturers Cross Index shows codes, names, and addresses  
of manufacturers or vendors of components listed in the parts list.  
10Ć2  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Manufacturers Cross Index  
Mfr.  
Code  
S3109  
TK0191  
Manufacturer  
Address  
City, State, Zip Code  
FELLER  
72 VERONICA AVE  
UNIT 4  
SUMMERSET NJ 08873  
TOKYO JAPAN 100-31  
TEKTRONIX JAPAN Ltd.  
PO BOX 5209  
TOKYO INTERNATIONAL  
TK0392  
TK0435  
TK1163  
TK1287  
NORTHWEST FASTENER SALES INC  
LEWIS SCREW CO  
8058 SW NIMBUS AVENUE  
4300 S RACINE AVE  
BEAVERTON OR 97008  
CHICAGO IL 60609-3320  
TIGARD OR 97223  
POLYCAST INC  
9898 SW TIGARD ST  
ENOCH MFG CO  
14242 SE 82ND DR  
PO BOX 98  
CLACKAMAS OR 97015  
TK1908  
TK1918  
TK2058  
TK2432  
TK2548  
PLASTIC MOLDED PRODUCTS  
SHIN-ETSU POLYMER AMERICA INC  
TDK CORPORATION OF AMERICA  
UNION ELECTRIC  
4336 SO ADAMS  
TACOMA WA 98409  
1181 NORTH 4TH ST  
SAN JOSE CA 95112  
1600 FEEHANVILLE DRIVE  
15/F #1, FU-SHING N. ROAD  
14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY  
MOUNT PROSPECT, IL 60056  
TAIPEI, TAIWAN ROC  
BEAVERTON OR 97077  
XEROX BUSINESS SERVICES  
DIV OF XEROX CORPORATION  
0JR05  
0KB01  
00779  
TRIQUEST CORP3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY  
VANCOUVER WA 98661-2999  
STAUFFER SUPPLY  
AMPINC  
810 SE SHERMAN  
PORTLAND OR 97214  
HARRISBURG PA 17105  
2800 FULLING MILL  
PO BOX 3608  
07416  
NELSON NAME PLATE CO  
BELDEN CORPORATION  
3191 CASITAS  
LOS ANGELES CA 90039-2410  
RICHMOND IN 47375-0010  
2W733  
2200 US HIGHWAY 27 SOUTH  
PO BOX 1980  
24931  
6D224  
61058  
SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC  
2100 EARLYWOOD DR  
PO BOX 547  
FRANKLIN IN 46131  
GARDENA, CA 90248  
SECAUCUS NJ 07094  
HARBOR TRI-TEC  
A BERG ELECTRONICS COMPANY  
14500 SOUTH BROADWAY  
MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPOF AMERICA  
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV  
TWO PANASONIC WAY  
61857  
61935  
64537  
73743  
78189  
SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP91-3 COLIN DRIVE  
SCHURTER INC  
HOLBROOK NY 11741  
1016 CLEGG COURT  
60 S JEFFERSON ROAD  
111 INDUSTRIAL RD  
ST CHARLES ROAD  
PETALUMA CA 94952-1152  
WHIPPANY, NJ 07981  
KDI/TRIANGLE ELECTRONICS  
FISCHER SPECIAL MFG CO  
COLD SPRING KY 41076-9749  
ELGIN IL 60120  
ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC  
SHAKEPROOF DIV  
80009  
86928  
TEKTRONIX INC  
14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR  
PO BOX 500  
BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001  
GLENDALE CA 91201-2431  
SEASTROM MFG CO INC  
701 SONORA AVE  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Code  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Qty Name & Description  
Mfr.PartNumber  
Number  
10-1-1  
-2  
343-1213-XX  
161-0230-01  
1
1
CLAMP,PWR CORD:POLYMIDE  
TK1163 ORDER BY DESC  
TK2432 ORDER BY DESC  
CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT,TAN  
(STANDARD ACCESSORY)  
-3  
-4  
-5  
-6  
-7  
-8  
-9  
334-3388-XX  
334-8410-XX  
334-8705-XX  
334-8697-XX  
211-0691-XX  
200-3991-XX  
390-1138-XX  
390-1145-XX  
211-0378-XX  
200-3983-XX  
348-1276-XX  
334-8708-XX  
260-2539-XX  
366-2164-XX  
354-0709-XX  
334-8696-XX  
378-0404-XX  
348-1289-XX  
211-0722-XX  
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
14  
1
1
1
1
1
MARKER,IDENT:MKD,SONY/TEKTRONIX  
MARKER,IDENT:BLANK,POLYESTER  
80009  
80009  
80009  
3343388XX  
3348410XX  
3348705XX  
J300101  
J310231  
J310326  
J310243  
MARKER,IDENT:MKD WARRNING/FUSE DATA,PC,W/CE  
MARKER,IDENT:MKD I/O SIGNALS,POLYCARBONATE  
SCR,ASSEMWSHR:6-32 X 0.625,PNH,STL,,T-15  
COVER,REAR:HARD,POLYCARBONATE,LEXAN  
CABINET,SCOPE:TEK BLUE,0.04 AL  
TK0191 334-8697-XX  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
TK1163 200-3991-XX  
J300101  
J310327  
80009  
80009  
3901138XX  
3901145XX  
CABINET,SCOPE:TEK BLUE,0.04 AL  
-10  
-11  
-12  
-13  
-14  
-15  
-16  
-17  
-18  
-19  
-20  
SCR,ASSEMWSHR:4-40 X 0.375.PNH,STL,T9  
BEZEL:FDD,AL  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
80009  
80009  
2003983XX  
3481276XX  
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE FORMSTRIP  
MARKER,IDENT:MKD AWG,HANDLE,POLYCARBONATE  
SWITCH,SET:;ELASTOMERIC BEZEL  
J300101  
TK0191 334-8708-XX  
TK1918 260-2539-XX  
PUSH BUTTON:SMOKE TAN  
80009  
80009  
3662164XX  
3540709XX  
RING,TRIM:LEXAN 940  
MARKER,IDENT:MKD AWG2005,POLYCARBONATE  
FILTER,LT,CRT:BULE SMOKE,112MM X 145MM X1MM THK  
SHLD GSKT,ELEK:MESH TYPE,3.2MM X 4.7MM  
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
TK0191 334-8696-XX  
80009  
80009  
3780404XX  
3481289XX  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
10Ć4  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
1
2
5
3
4
6
20  
19  
7
8
9
18  
10  
11  
12  
17  
14  
13  
15  
16  
Figure 10Ć1:ăCabinet  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Code  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Qty Name & Description  
Mfr.PartNumber  
Number  
10-2-1  
-2  
213-0882-XX  
119-4322-XX  
6
1
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437,PNH,T-15  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
FAN,TUBAXIAL:12VDC,2.4M/M,5.8MM HZO,6W  
(B100)  
80009  
1194322XX  
-3  
-4  
-5  
-6  
252-0571-XX  
342-0993-XX  
211-0722-XX  
620-0058-XX  
1
1
2
1
PLASTIC SHEET:EXTR CHAN,5MM X 3.3MM,NYLON  
INSULATOR,FILM:PWR SPLY,POLYCARBONATE  
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
80009  
2520571XX  
TK0191 342-0993-XX  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
POWER SUPPLY:185W;SWITCHING,15V/4A,12V/0.5A  
(PS920)  
80009  
6200058XX  
-7  
213-0882-XX  
366-1480-XX  
-----------  
-----------  
671-3351-XX  
3
1
1
1
1
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437,PNH,STL,T-15  
PUSH BUTTON:GRAY,0.328 X 0.253 X 0.43  
CAP,FUSEHOLDER:(P/O TABLE 2-2)  
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:(P/O TABLE 2-2)  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
-8  
0JR05  
80009  
ORDER BY DESC  
-9  
-10  
-11  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUX,POWER SUPPLY  
(A900)  
6713351XX  
-12  
-13  
213-0882-XX  
119-2683-XX  
2
1
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437,PNH,STL,T-15  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
TK2058 ZUB2206H-F  
FILTER,RFI:50/60HZ,250VAC,6A  
(FL100)  
-14  
-15  
-16  
-17  
-18  
-19  
-20  
426-2426-XX  
210-0457-XX  
334-3379-XX  
441-2054-XX  
210-0586-XX  
344-0472-XX  
1
1
1
1
2
1
FRAME,FAN MTG:POLYCARBONATE  
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312,STL  
MARKER,IDENT:MARKED GROUND SYMBOL07416  
CHASSIS ASSY:ALUMINUM,W/GASKET  
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL  
CLIP,CABLE:NYLON,GRAY  
TK1163 426-2426-XX  
TK0435 ORDER BY DESC  
ORDER BY DESC  
TK0191 441-2054-XX  
TK0435 ORDER BY DESC  
80009  
3440472XX  
407-4087-XX  
407-4394-XX  
J300101  
J310291  
J310290  
1
1
BRKT,CMPNT,BNC:ALUMINUM,5.250 X 1.050  
BRKT,CMPNT,BNC:ALUMINUM,5.250 X 1.050  
80009  
80009  
4074087XX  
4073494XX  
-21  
-22  
-23  
-24  
-25  
211-0325-XX  
134-0218-XX  
210-0005-XX  
211-0722-XX  
131-1315-XX  
4
2
1
1
2
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-9  
BUTTON,PLUG:0.625 DIA,PLASTIC,TAN  
WASHER,LOCK:#6 EXT,0.02 THK,STL  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
80009  
78189  
1340218XX  
1106-00  
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
0KB01 ORDER BY DESC  
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J198,J298)  
24931  
28JR306-1  
-26  
259-0086-XX  
1
FLEX CIRCUIT:BEZEL BUTTON  
(S100)  
07416  
ORDER BY DESC  
-27  
-28  
-29  
348-1313-XX  
426-2436-XX  
348-1302-XX  
1
1
1
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE URETHANE FOAM  
FRAME,CRT FLTR:POLYCARBONATE,BLACK  
80009  
80009  
80009  
3481313XX  
4262436XX  
3481302XX  
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE URETHANE FORM STRI  
P,W/ADHESIVE TAPE,1M L,AWG2020  
-30  
640-0079-XX  
640-0081-XX  
J300101  
J310101  
J310100  
1
1
DISPLAY MONITOR:7 INCH,480 X 640 PIXEL  
DISPLAY MONITOR:7 INCH,480 X 640 PIXEL  
(DS100)  
80009  
80009  
6400079X  
6400081XX  
10Ć6  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
5
6
1
2
4
3
30  
9
8
7
29  
14  
10  
11  
15  
16  
12  
13  
27  
28  
26  
25  
19  
17  
See Figure 10Ć5  
for Detailed View  
18  
23  
24  
20  
21  
22  
Figure 10Ć2:ăMain Chassis and CRT  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
Mfr. PartNumber  
Number  
10-3-1  
-2  
134-0218-XX  
131-1315-XX  
1
2
BUTTON,PLUG:0.625 DIA,PLASTIC,TAN  
80009  
24931  
1340218XX  
28JR306-1  
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J500,J550)  
-3  
-4  
348-1314-XX  
1
GASKET,SHIELD:FINGER RYPE,BE-CU,609.6MM L  
80009  
3481314XX  
211-0722-XX  
211-0722-XX  
J300101  
J310232  
J310231  
5
3
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
0KB01  
0KB01  
ORDER BY DESC  
ORDER BY DESC  
-5  
-6  
-7  
-8  
129-1051-XX  
134-0218-XX  
334-8698-XX  
131-1315-XX  
2
1
1
6
SPACER,POST:12.5 MM L,W/4-40 INT/ 4-40 EXT THD,AL  
BUTTON,PLUG:0.625 DIA,PLASTIC,TAN  
80009  
80009  
TK0191  
24931  
1291051XX  
1340218XX  
3348698XX  
28JR306-1  
MARKER,IDENT:MKD CH 1,2,3,4,POLYCARBONATE  
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J210,J220,J400,J410,J420,J430)  
-9  
210-0978-XX  
129-1107-XX  
210-0056-XX  
337-3964-XX  
344-0472-XX  
252-0571-XX  
342-0302-XX  
343-1639-XX  
J300313  
6
2
2
1
2
1
1
3
WASHER,FLAT:0.375 ID X 0.5 OD X 0.024,STL  
SPACER,POST:0.98 L,6-32 EXT & M3.5 INTTHD  
WASHER,LOCK:#10 SPLIT,0.047 THK,SI BRZ  
SHIELD,ELEC:REAR,CH 1,2,3,4,BRASS  
CLIP,CABLE:NYLON,GRAY  
0KB01  
TK1287  
86928  
ORDER BY DESC  
1291107XX  
-10  
-11  
-12  
-13  
-14  
-15  
-16  
-17  
ORDER BY DESC  
3373964XX  
TK0191  
80009  
3440472XX  
PLASTIC SHEET:EXTR CHAN,5MM X 3.3MM,NYLON  
INSULATOR,FILM:CHASSIS,MYLAR  
80009  
2520571XX  
80009  
3420302XX  
CLAMP,CABLE:9-13MM ID NYLON W/CUSHION  
TK0191  
3431639XX  
337-3983-XX  
337-4088-XX  
J300101  
J310497  
J310496  
1
1
SHIELD,ELEC:FDD,AL  
SHIELD,ELEC:FDD,AL  
TK0191  
TK0191  
3373983XX  
3374088XX  
-18  
-19  
-20  
-21  
-22  
407-4643-XX  
348-1276-XX  
119-4404-XX  
105-1081-XX  
211-1032-XX  
1
2
1
1
1
BRACKET,FDD,STL  
80009  
80009  
4074639XX  
3481276XX  
1194404XX  
1051081XX  
2111032XX  
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE FORM STRIP  
DISKDRIVE:FLOPPY,3.5 INCH W/INTERFACE (U950)  
BRACKET,SPACER  
80009  
TK1163  
TK0191  
SCREW,MACHINE:M2.6 X 8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-  
D,CROSS REC  
-23  
211-1033-XX  
3
SCREW,MACHINE:M2.6 X 3MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-  
D,CROSS REC  
TK0191  
2111033XX  
-24  
-25  
211-0325-XX  
671-3072-XX  
4
1
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-9  
0KB01  
ORDER BY DESC  
6713072XX  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:BACKPLANE  
(A5)  
TK0191  
-26  
146-0055-XX  
1
BATTERY,DRY:3.0V,1200 MAH,LITHIUM  
(A5BT001)  
61058  
BR-2/3A-E2P  
-27  
-28  
-29  
-30  
-31  
-32  
-33  
-34  
252-0571-XX  
210-0586-XX  
211-0722-XX  
337-3963-XX  
211-0373-XX  
343-1084-XX  
348-0948-XX  
671-3070-XX  
1
1
5
1
6
1
2
1
PLASTIC SHEET:EXTR CHAN,5MM X 3.3MM,NYLON  
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL  
80009  
2520571XX  
TK0435  
0KB01  
TK0191  
0KB01  
80009  
ORDER BY DESC  
ORDER BY DESC  
3373963XX  
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
SHIELD,ELEC:CENTER,ALUMINUM  
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-10  
CLAMP,CABLE:NYLON  
2110373XX  
3431084XX  
GROMMET,PLASTIC:BLACK,RING,9.5MM ID  
80009  
3480948XX  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG,2 CH  
(A23)  
TK0191  
6713070XX  
-35  
-36  
211-0722-XX  
252-0571-XX  
8
1
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
0KB01  
80009  
ORDER BY DESC  
2520571XX  
PLASTIC SHEET:EXTR CHAN,5MM X 3.3MM,NYLON  
10Ć8  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
7
3
2
5
6
1
4
8
5
36  
10  
11  
9
8
12  
14  
15  
13  
16  
17  
18  
23  
22  
21  
19  
32  
2
31  
33  
24  
20  
25 A5  
26  
27  
28  
34  
A23  
30  
29  
35  
Figure 10Ć3:ăMain Chassis and Circuit Boards  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
Mfr. PartNumber  
Number  
10-4-1  
-2  
671-3089-XX  
671-4000-XX  
671-5193-00  
671-B264-00  
J300101  
J310101  
J310100  
1
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A06 CPU  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A06 CPU  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A06 CPU  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A06 CPU  
(A6)  
TK0191  
80009  
80009  
80009  
671-3089-XX  
6714000XX  
671519300  
671B26400  
160-9788-XX  
163-0378-XX  
163-1449-00  
160-M392-00  
J300101  
J310101  
J310100  
J310100  
J310231  
1
1
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,100NS,PRGM  
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,120NS,PRGM  
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,120NS,PRGM  
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,120NS,PRGM  
(A6U305)  
TK0191  
80009  
80009  
80009  
160-9788-XX  
1630378XX  
163144900  
160M39200  
-3  
-4  
160-9787-XX  
163-0377-XX  
163-1448-00  
160-M391-00  
J300101  
J310101  
1
1
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,100NS,PRGM  
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,120NS,PRGM  
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,120NS,PRGM  
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,EPROM;256K X 16,120NS,PRGM  
(A6U300)  
TK0191  
80009  
80009  
80009  
160-9787-XX  
1630377XX  
163144800  
160M39100  
131-5165-XX  
1
CONN,RIBBON::PCB,;FEMALE,RTANG,24 POS,0.085CTR  
(A6J40)  
00779  
555139-1  
-5  
-6  
-7  
-8  
333-4123-XX  
211-0722-XX  
211-0001-XX  
671-3073-XX  
J300101  
2
5
6
1
PANEL,REAR:BRASS  
TK0191  
0KB01  
333-4123-XX  
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-15  
SCREW,MACHINE:2-56 X 0.25,PNH,STL  
ORDER BY DESC  
ORDER BY DESC  
671-3073-XX  
TK0435  
TK0191  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CLOCK  
(A1)  
-9  
211-0325-XX  
129-1409-XX  
671-3069-XX  
12  
4
SCR,ASSEMWSHR:4-40 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-9  
0KB01  
80009  
ORDER BY DESC  
1291409XX  
-10  
-11  
SPACER,POST:10.0MM L,4-40 INT THD BOTH ENDS,BRS  
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:D/A  
(A11)  
TK0191  
671-3069-XX  
-12  
671-3074-XX  
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AWG  
(A2)  
TK0191  
671-3074-XX  
10Ć10  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
4
5
3
6
2
5
1
A6  
7
9
12  
A2  
11  
A11  
10  
9
8
A1  
Figure 10Ć4:ăCircuit Boards  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
Mfr. PartNumber  
Number  
10-5-1  
671-2520-XX  
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:KEYBOARD  
(A12)  
TK0191  
671-2520-XX  
-2  
-3  
213-0048-XX  
260-2497-XX  
1
1
SETSCREW:4-40 X 0.125,STL  
TK0392  
80009  
ORDER BY DESC  
2602497XX  
J300101  
J300XXX  
J300XXX  
SWITCH,ROTARY:ENCODER,5VDC,70MA,INCREMENTAL  
(A12S103)  
260-2666-XX  
1
SWITCH,ROTARY:ENCODER,5VDC,70MA,INCREMENTAL  
(A12S103)  
80009  
2602666XX  
-4  
-5  
384-1686-XX  
160-7853-XX  
1
1
EXTENSION SHAFT:0.790 L X 0.500 DIA,PLASTIC  
80009  
80009  
3841686XX  
1607853XX  
IC,PROCESSOR:CMOS,MICROCOMPUTER  
(A12U101)  
-6  
-7  
-8  
-9  
210-0413-XX  
210-0840-XX  
348-1276-XX  
131-1315-XX  
2
1
1
1
NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.375-32 X 0.5,BRS  
73743  
86928  
80009  
24931  
3145-402  
WASHER,FLAT:0.39 ID X 0.562 OD X 0.02,STL  
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE FORMSTRIP  
ORDER BY DESC  
3481276XX  
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J970)  
28JR306-1  
-10  
-11  
-12  
-13  
-14  
-15  
-16  
366-2159-XX  
213-0153-XX  
333-4122-XX  
337-3962-XX  
380-1060-XX  
260-2552-XX  
366-2163-XX  
1
KNOB:IVORY GRAY,SCROLL,1.243 IDX 1.4 OD X 0.4 H  
SETSCREW:5-40 X 0.125,STL  
TK1163  
TK0392  
TK0191  
TK0191  
80009  
ORDER BY DESC  
ORDER BY DESC  
333-4122-XX  
337-3962-XX  
3801060XX  
1
1
PANEL,FRONT:MAIN KEY,POLYCARBONATE  
SHIELD,ELEC:FRONT PANEL,EMI,ALUMINUM FOIL  
HOUSING,SWITCH:POLYCARONATE,W/METALLIZED  
SWITCH,PUSH:50 BUTTON,SP/ST  
J300101  
J310231  
1
1
1
80009  
2602552XX  
34  
PUSH BUTTON:IVORY GRAY,OVAL  
80009  
3662163XX  
10Ć12  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
A12  
1
16  
2
15  
14  
3
13  
4
5
12  
11  
6
7
8
10  
9
Figure 10Ć5:ăFront Panel Assembly  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
OPTION 02  
Mfr. Part Number  
Number  
10-6-1  
131-1315-XX  
2
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J230,J240)  
24931  
28JR306-1  
-2  
-3  
210-0978-XX  
671-3074-XX  
J300313  
2
1
WASHER,FLAT:0.375 ID X 0.5 OD X 0.024,STL  
0KB01  
ORDER BY DESC  
671-3074-XX  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AWG  
(A2)  
TK0191  
-4  
671-3069-XX  
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:D/A  
(A11)  
TK0191  
671-3069-XX  
-5  
-6  
-7  
129-1409-XX  
211-0325-XX  
671-3071-XX  
4
8
1
SPACER,POST:10.0MM L,4-40 INT THD BOTH ENDS,BRS  
SCR,ASSEMWSHR:4-40 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T-9  
80009  
0KB01  
TK0191  
1291409XX  
ORDER BY DESC  
671-3071-XX  
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ANALOG,4 CH  
(A3)  
-8  
131-1315-XX  
2
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J398,J498)  
24931  
28JR306-1  
10Ć14  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
1
5
8
2
1
3
A2  
8
4
A11  
5
6
7
A3  
Figure 10Ć6:ăOption 02  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
OPTION 04  
Mfr. Part Number  
Number  
10-7-1  
-2  
337-3965-XX  
334-8699-XX  
131-5778-XX  
671-3068-XX  
1
1
2
1
SHIELD,ELEC:REAR,DDO,BRASS  
TK0191  
TK0191  
TK0191  
80009  
337-3965-XX  
334-8699-XX  
131-5778-XX  
671306801  
MARKER,IDENT:MKD DDO,POLYCARBONATE  
CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,RTANG,2 X 13,0.1 CTR  
-3  
-4  
CKT BD ASSY:AWG  
(A25)  
1
2
3
4
A25  
Figure 10Ć7:ăOption 04  
10Ć16  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Index  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
OPTION 05  
Mfr. Part Number  
Number  
10-8-1  
-2  
131-1315-XX  
671-3067-XX  
1
CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,;50 OHM,FEMALE  
(J360)  
24931  
80009  
28JR306-1  
6713067XX  
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CLOCK SWEEP  
(A31)  
1
1
2
A31  
Figure 10Ć8:ăOption 05  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Qty Name & Description  
OPTION 09  
Mfr. Part Number  
Number  
10-9-1  
671-3179-XX  
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FLOATING PROCESSOR  
(A7)  
TK0191  
671-3179-XX  
1
A7  
Figure 10Ć9:ăOption 09  
10Ć18  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Component Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Number  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Code  
Name & Description  
Mfr. Part Number  
W1  
W3  
W4  
174-2934-XX  
196-3112-XX  
174-2935-XX  
174-2803-XX  
174-2971-XX  
196-3389-XX  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,18 AWG,18CM L,AWG2020  
LEAD,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG,6.0 L,5-4  
80009  
80009  
80009  
80009  
80009  
80009  
1742934XX  
1963112XX  
1742935XX  
1742803XX  
1742971XX  
1963389XX  
J300100  
J310249  
J310248  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2.18 AWG,12CM L,W/CONN  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2.18 AWG,12CM L,W/CONN  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:22,18 AWG,10CM L,AFG2020  
LEAS,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG,15CM L,5-4,W/TERM LUG  
W6  
W7  
W10  
174-2936-XX  
174-3206-XX  
174-2938-XX  
174-3205-XX  
174-3200-XX  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,26 AWG,26CM L,RIBBON80009  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,65CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,42CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,20CM L,9-5,W/PELTOLA  
1742936XX  
TK0191  
80009  
W198  
W298  
W300  
W360  
174-3206-XX  
1742938XX  
TK0191  
TK0191  
174-3205-XX  
174-3200-XX  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,26CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
(OPTION05 ONLY)  
W398  
174-3209-XX  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,32CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
(OPTION02 ONLY)  
TK0191  
174-3209-XX  
W400  
W410  
W420  
W430  
174-3203-XX  
174-3204-XX  
174-3201-XX  
174-3202-XX  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,20CM L,9-3,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,20CM L,9-4,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,20CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,20CM L,9-2,W/PELTOLA  
TK0191  
TK0191  
TK0191  
TK0191  
174-3203-XX  
174-3204-XX  
174-3201-XX  
174-3202-XX  
W498  
W500  
174-3210-XX  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,15CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
(OPTION02 ONLY)  
TK0191  
174-3210-XX  
174-3208-XX  
174-3201-XX  
174-3200-XX  
174-2933-XX  
174-2945-XX  
J300100  
J310232  
J310231  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,18CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,18CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,26CM L,9-1,W/PELTOLA  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,26 AWG,15CM L,RIBBONW/O-SUB  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:10,26 AWG,23CM L,RIBBON80009  
TK0191  
TK0191  
174-3208-XX  
174-3201-XX  
174-3200-XX  
1742933XX  
W550  
W630  
W664  
TK0191  
80009  
1742945XX  
W675  
W900  
W1110  
174-2775-XX  
174-2770-XX  
174-3239-XX  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26,350MM L,FLAT FLEX  
80009  
1742770XX  
TK0191  
1742775XX  
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:10,26 AWG,390MM L,RIBBON80009  
CA ASSY,SP:30,30 AWG,80CM L,FLAT  
(OPTION04 ONLY)  
174-3239-XX  
174-3239-XX  
W1210  
174-3239-XX  
CA ASSY,SP:30,30 AWG,80CM L,FLAT  
(OPTION04 ONLY)  
TK0191  
AWG2005 Service Manual  
10Ć19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical Parts List  
Fig. &  
Tektronix Part Serial No. Serial No.  
Mfr.  
Code  
Index  
Number  
Effective  
Discont'd  
Qty Name & Description  
Mfr. Part Number  
Number  
STANDARD ACCESSORIES  
SOFTWARE PKG:3.5 DISK,AWG2005 WAVEFORM LIBRARY TK0191  
063-1704-XX  
063-1706-XX  
063-1708-XX  
1
1
1
063-1704-XX  
063-1706-XX  
063-1708-XX  
J310248  
SOFTWARE PKG:3.5 DISK,AWG2005 PERF CHECK/ADJ  
TK0191  
TK0191  
SOFTWARE PKG:3.5 DISK,AWG2000 SERIES SAMPLE  
PRGM  
070-8958-XX  
070-8657-XX  
1
1
MANUAL,TECH:USERS,AWG2005,DP  
TK2548  
TK2548  
0708958XX  
0708657XX  
MANUAL,TECH:PROGRAMMER,ENGLISH VER,AWG  
SERIES  
174-3192-XX  
-----------  
161-0104-05  
161-0104-06  
161-0104-07  
161-0104-08  
161-0167-00  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CA ASSY,SP:13,COAX,50 OHM,FLAT  
(OPTION 04 ONLY)  
TK0191  
174-3192-XX  
CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT,TAN  
(SEE FIGURE 1-2)  
CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 METER  
(OPTION A3 - AUSTRALIAN)  
S3109  
S3109  
S3109  
2W733  
S3109  
198-010  
CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 METER  
(OPTION A1 - EUROPEAN)  
198-010  
CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,240V/10A,2.5 METER  
(OPTION A2 - UNITED KINGDOM)  
209010  
CA ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,250/10A,98 INCH L  
(OPTION A4 - NORTH AMERICAN)  
ORDER BY DESC  
ORDER BY DESC  
CA ASSY,PWR:3,0.75MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 METER  
(OPTION A5 - SWITZERLAND)  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
TERMN,COAXIAL:50 OHM,2W,BNC  
CABLE,INTCON:SHLD CMPST,GPIB;CRC,12 TW PR  
CA ASSY,RF:COAXIAL,;RFD,50 OHM,24 L,BNC,MALE  
POUCH:POUCH & PLATE,GPS SIZE  
FIXTURE,CAL:AWG2005  
011-0049-XX  
012-0991-XX  
012-1342-XX  
016-1159-XX  
067-1396-XX  
070-8962-50  
200-3232-XX  
159-0239-XX  
159-0210-XX  
200-2264-XX  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
64537  
6D224  
80009  
80009  
TK0191  
80009  
TK1908  
80009  
61857  
61935  
T132DS  
81190-020  
0121342XX  
0161159XX  
067-1396-XX  
0708962XX  
ORDER BY DESC  
1590239XX  
ET 5 AMP  
MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE,AWG2005,DP  
COVER,FRONT:ABS  
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,6A,250V,MEDIUM  
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:DIN 5 X 20MM,5AMP,250V  
CAP,FUSEHOLDER:3AG FUSES  
(FOR 159-0239-XX)  
FEK 031 1666  
200-2265-XX  
1
CAP,FUSEHOLDER:5 X 20MM FUSES  
(FOR 159-0210-XX)  
61935  
FEK 031.1663  
10Ć20  
Mechanical Parts List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

TIC Speaker TFS0 User Manual
TIMEX Weather Products Robotics RF 62 User Manual
TP Link Network Router TL MR7HN User Manual
Trane Air Conditioner TTA075A TTA200B User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone EXI2960 User Manual
Vicks Thermometer V925P User Manual
Visioneer Photo Scanner One Touch 9420 User Manual
VTech Two Way Radio VT 1311 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Hot Beverage Maker VELT100 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Oven ML 138020 User Manual